Bmw 2015 428I Gran Coupe Owners Manual

2015-04-13

: Bmw Bmw-2015-428I-Gran-Coupe-Owners-Manual-694678 bmw-2015-428i-gran-coupe-owners-manual-694678 bmw pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 249

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Contents

Owner's Manual
for Vehicle

A-Z

The Ultimate
Driving Machine®

THE BMW 4 SERIES
GRAN COUPE.
OWNER'S MANUAL.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

4 Series
Gran Coupe

Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or
Integrated Owner's Manual are found in the appendix of the
printed Quick Reference for the vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
BMW AG

The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.
Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

© 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English II/15, 03 15 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Addendum

ADDENDUM TO OWNER'S MANUAL
We wanted to provide you with some updates
and clarifications with respect to the printed
BMW Owner's Manual. These updates and
clarifications will supersede the materials contained in that document.
1. Where the terms “service center,” “the service center,” “your service center,” “service
specialist,” or “service” are used in the
Owner's Manual, we wanted to clarify that
the terms refer to a BMW dealer's service
center or another service center or repair
shop that employs trained personnel that
can perform maintenance and repair work
on your vehicle in accordance with BMW
specifications.
2. Where the text of the Owner's Manual contains an affirmative instruction to contact a
“service center” or “your service center,”
we wanted to clarify that BMW recommends that, if you are faced with one of the
situations addressed by that text, you contact or seek the assistance of a BMW
dealer's service center or another service
center or repair shop that employs trained
personnel that can perform maintenance
and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications.
While BMW of North America LLC, at no
cost to you, will pay for repairs required by
the limited warranties provided with respect
to your vehicle and for maintenance under
the Maintenance Program during the applicable warranty and maintenance coverage
periods, you are free to elect, both during
those periods and thereafter, to have maintenance and repair work provided by other
service centers or repair shops.
3. Where the Owner's Manual makes reference to parts and accessories having been
approved by BMW, those references are
intended to reflect that those parts and
accessories are recommended by BMW of
North America LLC. You may elect to use
other parts and accessories, but, if you do,

we recommend that you make sure that any
such parts and/or accessories are appropriate for use on your vehicle.
4. At page 7, under the warranty section's discussion of homologation, where it states
that you “cannot lodge warranty claims for
your vehicle there,” the text should read
that you “may not be able to lodge warranty
claims for your vehicle there.”
5. At page 7, under the “Parts and accessories” section, in the sixth sentence, the
word “cannot” should read “does not.”
6. At page 55, in the “Check and replace
safety belts” section, the text beginning,
“This should only be done by your service
center …” should be disregarded and the
following text should be read in lieu thereof:
“BMW recommends having this work performed by a service center as it is important
that this safety feature functions properly.”
7. At page 92, under the heading: “Special
windshield,” the paragraph beginning,
“Therefore, have the special windshield …”
should be disregarded and the following
text should be read in lieu thereof: “BMW
recommends that you have the special
windshield replaced by the service center.”
8. At page 169 under the heading: “Objects
within the range of movement of the pedals” and at page 227 under the heading:
“Carpets and floor mats,” the paragraph
that begins: “Only use floor mats …” should
be disregarded and the following language
should be read in lieu thereof: “The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that
you use floor mats that have been identified
by it as appropriate for use in your vehicle
and that can be properly fixed in place.”
9. At page 175, under the heading: “Have
maintenance carried out,” the sentence
beginning, “The maintenance should be
carried out …” should be disregarded and
the following text should be read in lieu

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Addendum
thereof: “BMW recommends that you have
the maintenance carried out by your service
center.”
10. At page 188, under the heading “Tire inflation specifications,” the sentence beginning, “Tire inflation pressure specifications
apply to approved tire sizes …” should be
disregarded.
11. At page 194, under the heading: “Mounting,” the paragraph beginning, “Have
mounting and balancing …” should be disregarded and the following text should be
read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends
that you have mounting and balancing performed by your service center or a tire
mounting specialist.”
12. At page 195, under the heading: “Approved
wheels and tires,” the term “Approved”
should be disregarded and in lieu thereof,
the term “Recommended” should be read
in its place. In addition, the text of that section should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof:
The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly
suggests that you use wheels and tires that
have been recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, for example, despite having the same
official size ratings, variations can lead to
body contact and with it, the risk of severe
accidents.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not
evaluate non-recommended wheels and
tires to determine if they are suitable for use
on your vehicle.
13. At page 199, under the heading: “Snow
Chains,” the text should be disregarded and
the following text should be read in lieu
thereof:
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains
have been tested by the manufacturer of
your vehicle and are determined by the
manufacturer of your vehicle to be road safe
and are recommended by the manufacturer
of your vehicle.

Information about recommended snow
chains is available from a service center.
14. At page 202, under the heading “Hood,” the
sentence beginning, “If you are unfamiliar”
should be disregarded.
15. At page 205, under the heading: “Engine oil
change,” the text should be disregarded
and in lieu thereof should be read as follows:
BMW recommends that you have the oil
changed at your BMW dealer's service center or at another service center that has
trained personnel that can perform the work
in accordance with BMW specifications.
16. At page 207, under the heading: “Service
and Warranty Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models,” the second
paragraph should be disregarded and the
following text read in lieu thereof:
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have maintenance and
repair performed by your BMW dealer's service center or another service center or
repair shop that employs trained personnel
that can perform maintenance and repair
work on your vehicle in accordance with
BMW specifications. The manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you maintain
records of all maintenance and repair work
performed on your vehicle.
17. At page 210, where it reads: “Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon
headlights,” that text should be disregarded
and in lieu thereof the following text should
be read: “Xenon headlight work or replacement can cause serious and fatal injuries.”
In the text that follows, where it reads:
“[h]ave any work on the xenon lighting
system … ,” the following words should be
read as preceding that passage: “It is
strongly suggested that you …”
18. At page 215, under the “Battery replacement” section, the text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the following text
should be read:

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Addendum
Use of recommended vehicle batteries
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use vehicle batteries that it
has tested and recommends for use in your
vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be
damaged and systems or functions may not
be fully available.
After a battery replacement, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you
have the battery registered on your vehicle
by a service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available, and that
any “check control” messages of these
comfort functions are no longer displayed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 234.

Notes

At a glance
14
18
27
30

Cockpit
iDrive
Voice activation system
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

184
186
188
201
203
206
207
209
218
224

Refueling
Fuel
Wheels and tires
Engine compartment
Engine oil
Coolant
Maintenance
Replacing components
Breakdown assistance
Care

Reference

Controls
34
51
61
65
78
93
98
120
125
146
153
161

Mobility

Opening and closing
Adjusting
Transporting children safely
Driving
Displays
Lights
Safety
Driving stability control systems
Driving comfort
Climate control
Interior equipment
Storage compartments

230 Technical data
234 Everything from A to Z

Driving tips
168 Things to remember when driving
171 Loading
174 Saving fuel

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Notes

Notes
Using this Owner's Manual

Symbols

The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.

Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the
vehicle.

An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.

◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
information.

Orientation

Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
for the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐
pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the
vehicle.

User's manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication and the short commands of the
voice activation system are described in a sep‐
arate user's manual, which is also included
with the onboard literature.

Additional sources of
information
The service center will be happy to answer any
other questions you may have.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.

BMW Driver’s Guide App
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
tries as an app. Additional information on the
Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide

Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
"..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.

Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.

Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐
scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐
able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐
lected optional features or the country-specific
version.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
The respectively applicable country provisions
must be observed when using the respective
features and systems.
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Handbooks.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Notes

On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls
are arranged differently from what is shown in
the illustrations.

Status of the Owner's
Manual

Therefore, have this work performed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐
ately trained personnel.
If work is not carried out properly, there is a
danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.

Basic information

Parts and accessories

The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.

BMW recommends using parts and accesso‐
ries approved by BMW for this purpose.

Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
for the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐
pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the
vehicle.

For your own safety
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated
in a different country it might be necessary to
adapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper‐
ating conditions and permit requirements. If
your vehicle does not comply with the homolo‐
gation requirements in a certain country you
cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle
there. Further information can be obtained
from your Service Centre.

Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair work.

Your BMW center is the right contact for genu‐
ine BMW parts and accessories, other prod‐
ucts approved by BMW and related qualified
advice.
BMW has tested these products for safety and
suitability in relation to BMW vehicles.
BMW can assume responsibility for them.
However, we cannot assume any responsibility
whatsoever for parts and accessories that have
not been specifically approved by BMW.
BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual
product from another manufacturer can be
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard. This guarantee does not apply
when country-specific government approval
has been granted. Testing of this kind may fail
to embrace the entire range of potential oper‐
ating conditions to which components might
be exposed on BMW vehicles. Such products
could conceivably fail to comply with BMW's
own stringent quality standards.

California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Notes

chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.

Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
ranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐
ited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
conditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please contact
Customer Relations for further information.

Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8

Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

Data memory
Many electronic components on your vehicle
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
and faults. This technical information generally
records the state of a component, a module, a
system or the environment:
▷ Operating mode of system components, fill
levels for instance.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from
its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐
tion speed/vehicle speed, deceleration,
transverse acceleration.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐
ing the stability control system.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
This data is purely technical in nature and is
used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
routes traveled cannot be created from this
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐
pair services, service processes, warranty
claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐
mation can be read out from the event and
fault memories by the service personnel, in‐

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Notes

cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐
nostic tools. You can obtain further information
there if you need it. After an error is corrected,
the information in the fault memory is deleted
or overwritten on a continuous basis.
With the vehicle in use there are situations
where you can associate these technical data
with individuals if combined with other infor‐
mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the
vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with
the assistance of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer - such as vehicle
emergency locating - you can transmit certain
vehicle data from the vehicle.

Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.

conditions and no personal data, e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.

Vehicle identification
number

The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment.
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.

▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.

Reporting safety defects

▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.

For US customers

▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving

The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Notes

wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.

For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Notes

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

At a glance

Cockpit

Cockpit
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

All around the steering wheel

Rear window safety switch 47

Power windows, individual 47

Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 117

Exterior mirror operation 58

Intelligent Safety 107

Glove compartment on the driver's
side 161

Lane departure warning 115

Driver assistance systems
5

Lights

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Cockpit

Front fog lights 96

Reduce distance 125

Parking lights 93

Increase distance 125

Low beams 93
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 94

Cruise control rocker switch 131, 125
8

Instrument cluster 78

Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source

Daytime running lights 94
Adaptive Light Control 94

Volume

High-beam Assistant 95
Instrument lighting 96

Voice activation 27

Steering column stalk, left

Telephone, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication

Turn signal 69
High beams, head‐
light flasher 69

At a glance

Thumbwheel for selection lists 87
10 Steering column stalk, right

High-beam Assistant 95

Wiper 70

Roadside parking lights 94

Rain sensor 71

On-board computer 87

Clean the windshields and head‐
lights 72

Steering wheel buttons, left

Store speed 131, 125

Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 66
Auto Start/Stop function 67

Resume speed 131, 125
12 Horn, total area
Cruise control on/off, inter‐
rupt 131

Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐
terrupting 125

14 Adjust steering wheel 60

Steering wheel heating 60

15 Unlock hood 202

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

At a glance

Cockpit

All around the center console

Control Display 18

Ventilation 151

PDC Park Distance Control 133
Rearview camera 136

Hazard warning system 218

Parking assistant 141
Surround View 136

Central locking system 40

Glove compartment 161

Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐
nication

Climate control 146

Controller with buttons 18

Parking brake 69

Side View 138

Driving Dynamics Control 122
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 120

11 Steptronic transmission selector
lever 73
Manual transmission selector lever 73

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Cockpit

At a glance

All around the roofliner

Intelligent Emergency Re‐
quest 218

Reading lights 96

Glass sunroof, powered 49

Interior lights 96

Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐
senger airbag 100

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

At a glance

iDrive

iDrive
Vehicle features and options

Control Display

This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

Hints

The concept
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐
ated from a central location.
Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐
ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's
occupants and to other traffic, never attempt
to use the controls or enter information unless
traffic and road conditions allow it.◀

▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the
care instructions.
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
▷ In the case of very high temperatures on
the Control Display, e.g. due to intense so‐
lar radiation, the brightness may be re‐
duced down to complete deactivation.
Once the temperature is reduced, e.g.
through shadow or climate control system,
the normal functions are re-established.

Switching on
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the controller.

Switch off
1.

Press button.

2. "Turn off control display"

Control elements at a glance
Control elements

Controller with navigation system

Control Display

The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.

Controller with buttons and, depending on
the equipment version, with touchpad

Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

iDrive

1. Turn.

At a glance

Press button

Function

BACK

Displays the previous panel.

OPTION

Opens the Options menu.

Controller without navigation system
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
1. Turn.

2. Press.

3. Move in four directions.

2. Press.

3. Move in two directions.

Buttons on controller
Press button

Function

Open the main menu.

RADIO

Opens the Radio menu.

MEDIA

Opens the Multimedia menu.

NAV

Opens the Navigation menu.

TEL

Opens the phone menu.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

At a glance

iDrive

Buttons on controller

Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.

Press button Function
MENU

Open the main menu.

Audio

Open audio menu last listened
to, switch between audio me‐
nus.

TEL

Opens the phone menu.

BACK

Open previous panel.

OPTION

Opens the Options menu.

Operating concept
Opening the main menu
Press button.

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.

2. Press the controller.

Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".

Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
Closes current display and shows previous
display.

The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.

Reopens previous display by pressing
BACK button. In this case, the current
panel is not closed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
Opens new display on top of previous
screen.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

iDrive

White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐
cate that additional panels can be opened.

At a glance

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.

Display of an opened menu
When selecting a menu, it generally opens with
the panel that was last selected in that menu.
To display the first panel of a menu:
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice.

Opening the Options menu
Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.

3. Press the controller.

Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.

Touchpad
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller:
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is
displayed.

2. "Touchpad"

Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
This area remains unchanged.
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".

Changing settings
1. Select a field.

Selecting functions
1. "Settings"
3. Select the desired function.
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐
tive map.
▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.

Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

At a glance

iDrive

▷ For the input of upper/lower case letters
and numbers, it may be necessary to reel
via the controller to the corresponding In‐
put mode, refer to page 25, e.g. when the
spelling of upper and lower case letters is
identical.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
as accents or periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. Possible input de‐
pends on the set language. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the con‐
troller.

Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock
On the Control Display:
1.

Press button. The main menu is dis‐
played.

2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.

▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in
the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
in the lower area of the touchpad.

3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.

Using interactive map and Internet
Via touch-pad move the interactive map in the
navigation system and Internet sites.
Function

Controls

Move interactive map or
Internet sites.

Swipe into re‐
spective direc‐
tion.

Enlarge/shrink interactive Drag in or out on
map or Internet sites.
the touchpad with
fingers.

5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.

Display the menu or open Tap once.
a link in the Internet.

Changing settings
You may change control display settings via
touchpad. Swipe left or right accordingly.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

iDrive

6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.

At a glance

Symbol Meaning
Text message was received.

7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.

Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.

Status information

SIM card is missing.

Status field

Enter PIN.

The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right:
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.

Entertainment symbols
Symbol

Meaning

▷ Sound output, on/off.

CD/DVD player.

▷ Wireless network reception strength.

Music collection.

▷ Phone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.

Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows.

Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.

Radio symbols
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning

Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are turned off.

Split screen
General information

Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Wireless network reception
strength.
Symbol flashes: network search.

Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the on-board comupter.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.

Wireless network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

At a glance

iDrive

Switching the split screen on and off
On the Control Display:
1.

Only radio stations can be stored on the but‐
tons, refer to user's manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication.

Press button.

2. "Split screen"

Saving a function

Selecting the display

1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.

On the Control Display:
1.

Without navigation system and
telephone

Press button.

2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.

Press and hold the desired button,
until a signal sounds.

Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately.
This means, e.g., that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the button assignment
Touch buttons with bare fingers. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at top edge of
screen.

Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and menu entries.

Deleting the button assignments

Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.

2. "OK"

1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. five seconds.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

iDrive

At a glance

Deleting personal in the
vehicle

Entering letters and numbers
General information

The concept

On the Control Display:

Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
These personal data can be permanently de‐
leted through iDrive.

1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.

General information

3. "OK": confirm the entry.

Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:

2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.

Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the let‐
ter or number.

▷ Personal Profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored Favorites buttons.

Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.

▷ Travel and computer information.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, e.g. stored destinations.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Online data, e.g. Favorites, cookies.
▷ Voice notes.
▷ Login accounts.

Switching between cases, letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can reel between
entering upper and lower case, letters and
numbers:
Symbol

Function

▷ RemoteApp smartphone tethering.

Enter the letters.

Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 30 minutes.

Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.

Deleting data

1. Switch on the ignition.
2. "Settings"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete personal data"
6. "OK"

Tip controller up.

Without navigation system
Select the symbol.

Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
trol Display.

5. "Continue"

Enter the numbers.

Entry comparison
Entering names and addresses: choice is nar‐
rowed down with every letter entered and let‐
ters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during input
for which data is available.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

At a glance

iDrive

▷ Target search: names of locations may be
entered in languages available through
Control Display.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Voice activation system

At a glance

Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1.

Press button on the steering
wheel.

2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
A command that is recognized by the voice
activation system is announced and dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.

The concept

This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.

▷ Most functions displayed on the Control
Display can be operated by voice com‐
mands via the voice activation system. The
system supports you with announcements
during input.

If no other commands are available, use func‐
tion via iDrive.

▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the
voice activation system.

Briefly press the button on the steer‐
ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.

▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation
system.

Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
Set the language, refer to page 91.

Terminating the voice activation
system

Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
There are short commands for many functions.
You may select lists such as phone lists via
voice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐
actly as they show in the respective list.

Having possible commands read aloud
You can have available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹
E. g. if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the
commands for the settings are read out loud.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

At a glance

Voice activation system

Executing functions using short
commands

Execute functions on the main menu via short
commands. It almost doesn't matter which
menu item is selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.

3. ›Tone‹

List of short commands for the voice activation
system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication Owner's Manual.

Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐
tion about the current operating options
and the most important commands for
them.

Press button on the steering
wheel.

Setting the voice dialog
Set system to standard dialog or use a short
version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays
back short messages in abbreviated form.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech type:"
4. Select setting.

▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the
voice activation system is announced.

One example: open the tone
settings
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller.

Adjusting the volume

1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if
needed.

Turn the volume button while giving an in‐
struction until the desired volume is set.

▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.

Press button on the steering
wheel.

▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐
rently in use.

3. ›Radio‹
4. ›Tone‹

Via short command
The desired tone settings can also be started
via a short command.
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if
needed.

Hints on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Voice activation system

At a glance

This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 218, close to the interior mirror.

Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

At a glance

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle features and options

Select components

Press button.

2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle info".
3. Press the controller.
4. Selecting desired range:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Owner's Manual"

Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. It specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle.

Components of the Integrated
Owner's Manual
The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or possible access.

Quick Reference Guide
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
tion how to operate the car, how to use basic
vehicle functions or what to do in case of a
breakdown. This information can also be dis‐
played while driving.

Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous
page is displayed.

Page by page without link access
Scroll through the pages directly while skip‐
ping the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
the controller to browse from page to page.
Scroll back.

Search by images
Image search provides information and de‐
scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐
ogy for a feature is not at hand.

Scroll forward.

Owner's Manual
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Context help - Owner's Manual to the
temporarily selected function
You may open the relevant information di‐
rectly.

At a glance

Programmable memory buttons
General information

Opening via the iDrive

The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly.

To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the Options menu:

Storing
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.

Press button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.

2. "Display Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:

Press selected button for more
than 2 seconds.

Executing
Press button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
mediately.

"Display Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To reel from a function, e. g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
alternate between the two displays:
1.

Press button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.

2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.

Press button again to return to last
displayed function.

Press button to return to the page of
the Owner's Manual displayed last.

To alternate permanently between the last dis‐
played function and the Owner's Manual re‐
peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every
time.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that
are useful for driving and your safety, comfort
and convenience are described here.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Opening and closing

Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options

Overview

Unlocking

Locking

Open the tailgate

General information

Panic mode

The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key.

Integrated key

Remote control/key

Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐
tery.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. For Settings, refer to page 45.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Personal Profile, refer to
page 35.
The remote controls hold information on re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐
mote control, refer to page 207

Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar‐
row 2.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door.
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Opening and closing

Replacing the battery

Controls

▷ Interference of radio transmission by
charger while charging items such as mo‐
bile devices in the vehicle.
A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐
tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start
the engine.

Starting the engine with emergency
detection of the remote control
1. Remove integrated key from remote con‐
trol.
2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
ment, arrow 2.
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
Take the used battery to a recycling
center or to your service center.

New remote controls
New remote controls are available from the
service center.

Steptronic transmission: if a corresponding
Check Control message appears, hold the re‐
mote control, as shown, against the marked
area on the steering column and press the
Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while
pressing the brake.

Lost remote controls can be disabled by your
service center.

Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check
Control message appears, hold the remote
control, as shown, against the marked area on
the steering column and press the Start/Stop
button within 10 seconds while pressing the
clutch pedal.

Emergency detection of remote
control

If the remote control is not recognized: slightly
change the height position of the remote con‐
trol and repeat the procedure.

Loss of the remote controls

It is possible to switch on the ignition or start
the engine in situations such as the following:
▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐
mote control by external sources e.g., by
radio masts.
▷ Empty battery in remote control.
▷ Interference from radio transmissions
through mobile devices in close proximity
to remote control.

Personal Profile
The concept
Personal Profile provides three profiles, using
which personal vehicle settings can be stored.
Every remote control has one of these profiles
assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal profile will be acti‐

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Opening and closing

vated. All settings stored in the profile are au‐
tomatically applied.

Profile management

If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings
during unlocking. These settings are also re‐
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the
meantime by a person with a different remote
control.

Opening profiles

Changes to the settings are automatically
saved in the personal profile.

3. Select a profile.

Three personal profiles and a guest profile can
be created.

Adjusting
The settings for the following systems and
functions are saved in the active profile. The
scope of storable settings is country- and
equipment-dependable.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.

Regardless of the remote control in use a dif‐
ferent profile may be activated.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile
are automatically applied.
▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐
mote control being used at the time.
▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐
ent remote control, this profile will apply to
both remote controls. It cannot be differen‐
tiated anymore between the settings for
the two remote controls.

Renaming profiles
A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐
file to avoid confusion between the profiles.

▷ Climate control.
▷ Radio.

1. "Settings"

▷ Instrument cluster.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.

2. "Profiles"
3. "Options"
4. "Rename current profile"

▷ Control Display.
▷ Navigation.

Resetting profiles

▷ Park Distance Control PDC.
▷ Rearview camera

The settings of the active profile are reset to
their default values.

▷ Side View.

1. "Settings"

▷ Head-up Display.

2. "Profiles"

▷ Driving Dynamics Control.

3. "Options"

▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐
tion, steering wheel position.

4. "Reset current profile"

▷ Cruise control.

Exporting profiles

▷ Intelligent Safety.

Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐
ported.

▷ Active Blind Spot Detection.

This can be helpful for securing and retrieving
personal settings, before delivering the vehicle
to a workshop, e.g. Profiles can be taken to an‐

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Opening and closing

other vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐
file function.

Controls

Display profile list during start

The following export options are available:

The profile list can be displayed during each
start to select the desired profile.

▷ Via BMW Online.

1. "Settings"

▷ Via the USB port to a USB device.

2. "Profiles"

Popular file systems for USB devices are
supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the rec‐
ommended formats for profile export.
Other formats may not support the export.
1. "Settings"

3. "Options"
4. "Display user list at startup"

Using the remote control

2. "Profiles"

Note

3. "Export profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface: "USB device"

Take the remote control with you

Profiles exported via BMW Online can also be
imported via BMW Online.

People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle
can then be opened from the outside.◀

Profiles stored on a USB device can be im‐
ported via the USB interface.

Unlocking

Importing profiles

Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐
ported profile.

Press button on the remote control.
▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
are being unlocked.

1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface: "USB device"

Using the guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that
are saved in none of the three personal pro‐
files.

▷ Interior lamps and courtesy lamps are acti‐
vated. This function is not available, if the
interior lamps were switched off manually.
▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if this
function was activated.
▷ Exterior mirrors folded through convenient
closing are folded open.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
For Settings, refer to page 45.

This can be useful for drivers who are using
the vehicle temporarily and do not have their
own profile.

The alarm system, refer to page 46, is dis‐
armed.

1. "Settings"

Convenient opening
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.

2. "Profiles"
3. "Guest"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Opening and closing

The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the remote
control is pressed.

Locking
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐
not be unlocked from inside without special
knowledge.◀
The driver's door must be closed.
Press button on the remote control.
All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are
being locked.
The alarm system, refer to page 46, is armed.

Switching on interior lights and
courtesy lights
Press button on the remote control with
the vehicle locked.
This function is not available, if the interior
lamps were switched off manually.
If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐
onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐
tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the antitheft warning system, refer to page 47, are
turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐
fore pressing the button again.

Opening the tailgate
Note the opening height of the tailgate
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance
when the tailgate opens; otherwise, damage
may result.◀
Press button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
The closed tailgate is automatically opened,
whether or not the vehicle is locked or un‐
locked.
Depending on the features and the country
version, it is also possible to have door un‐
locked. Create the settings, refer to page 45.
If the doors were not unlocked, the tailgate is
locked again as soon as it closes.
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the tailgate is closed.◀
Provide edge protection
Sharp objects or those with edges can
hit the rear window while driving and damage
the heat conductors of the rear window. Pro‐
vide edge protection.◀

Malfunction

Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To reel off the alarm: press any button.

Remote control detection by the vehicle can
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 35.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmit power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Opening and closing

▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with‐
out remote control, refer to page 39.

For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:

Controls

Without remote control
From the outside
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐
not be unlocked from inside without special
knowledge.◀
Remove the key before pulling the door
handle
Before pulling the outside door handle, remove
the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and
the key.◀

FCC ID:
▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E.
▷ LX8CAS.
▷ LX8CAS2.
▷ MYTCAS4.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.

Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door
lock using the integrated key, refer to page 34.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.

Alarm system
The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is
locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle was unlocked via the
door lock.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
tion, if needed, through emergency detection
of the remote control, refer to page 35.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Opening and closing

From the inside

Tailgate

Unlocking and locking

Automatic tailgate operation
Adjusting the opening height
You can set how far the tailgate should open.
Adjusting the opening height
When adjusting the opening height, en‐
sure that there is a clearance of at least
4 in/10 cm above the tailgate. Otherwise, the
ceiling may not be high enough for the open
tailgate if the loading situation changes.◀

Pressing the central locking system button
locks or unlocks the vehicle with the front
doors closed.

1. "Settings"

The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.

3. Turn the controller until the desired open‐
ing height is selected.

The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.

Unlocking and opening

2. "Tailgate"

Opening
Note the opening height of the tailgate
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance
when the tailgate opens; otherwise, damage
may result.
Adjust the opening height of the tailgate ac‐
cording to the given situation.◀

▷ Press the central locking system button to
unlock the doors together, and then pull
the door handle above the armrest.
▷ On the door to be opened, pull the door
handle twice: the first time unlocks the
door, the second time opens it. The other
doors remain locked.

▷ Press button on tailgate's exterior
▷

Press button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
As the case may be, the doors are also un‐
locked. Opening with the remote control,
refer to page 38.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Opening and closing

▷

Controls

Push the button in the driver's
footwell.

If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens
automatically to the adjusted opening height.
The opening procedure is interrupted:
▷ By pressing a button again.
▷ When starting the engine.
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate.

▷ Press button on the inside of the tailgate.
With Comfort Access:

Closing
Keep the closing path clear
Make sure that the closing path of the
tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐
sult.◀
Monitor closing
Monitor closing to ensure that no one
becomes trapped.◀
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the tailgate is closed.◀
Provide edge protection
Sharp objects or those with edges can
hit the rear window while driving and damage
the heat conductors of the rear window. Pro‐
vide edge protection.◀

▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the
tailgate.
Pressing the button again stops the mo‐
tion.
▷ Press button, arrow 2.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
tailgate. The driver's door must be closed
for this purpose and the remote control
must be outside of the vehicle in the area
of the tailgate.
Pressing the button again stops the mo‐
tion.

The floor panel in the trunk must be closed,
otherwise the tailgate cannot be closed.
Without Comfort Access:

▷ Press button on tailgate's exterior

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Opening and closing

Pressing the button again stops the mo‐
tion.

Emergency unlocking

An acoustic signal sounds and the tailgate
closes.
The closing operation is interrupted:
▷ When starting the engine.
▷ The vehicle starts off with jerks.

Manual operation
Do not operate the tailgate manually if it
is blocked
If the tailgate is blocked, do not operate it man‐
ually as the tailgate may otherwise become
damaged and injury may result.
Contact your service center.◀
In the event of an electrical malfunction, oper‐
ate the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow
and smooth motion.

Pull the handle inside the trunk.
The tailgate is unlocked.

Comfort Access
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.

Locking separately
The tailgate can be locked separately, using
the switch in the front center armrest.
▷ The tailgate is locked, ar‐
row 1.
The small and large tailgates
are locked.
▷ The tailgate is unlocked, ar‐
row 2.
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This
secures the tailgate and disconnects it from
the central locking system.
When the center armrest is locked, the tailgate
cannot be accessed. This is beneficial when
the vehicle is parked using valet service. The
infrared remote control can be handed out
without the key.

The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
car's interior.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Separate unlocking of the tailgate.
▷ Open/close tailgate with no-touch activa‐
tion.
▷ Start the engine.

Functional requirements
▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
ence nearby.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Opening and closing

Controls

▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
mote control is in the vehicle.

Convenient closing

Unlocking

Monitor closing to ensure that no one
becomes trapped.◀

Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
passenger door completely, arrow.

Monitor closing

This corresponds with pressing the button on
the remote control.

Touch the surface on the door handle of the
driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with
your finger and hold it there without grasping
the door handle.

Locking

This corresponds to pressing and holding
the remote control button.
In addition to locking, the windows and the
glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors
fold in.

Unlocking the tailgate separately
Press button on tailgate's exterior
This corresponds with pressing the button on
the remote control.
Touch the surface on the door handle of the
driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with
your finger for approx. 1 second without grasp‐
ing the door handle.
This corresponds with pressing the button on
the remote control.
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
sumers are turned off before locking the vehi‐
cle.

The situation of the doors does not change.
Note the opening height of the tailgate
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance
when the tailgate opens; otherwise, damage
may result.◀
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the tailgate is closed.◀

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Opening and closing

Opening and closing the tailgate with
no-touch activation
The tailgate can be opened and closed with
no-touch activation using the remote control
you are carrying. Two sensors detect a for‐
ward-directed foot motion in the center of the
area at the rear of the car and the trunk lid
opens and/or closes.

Foot movement to be carried out
Do not touch vehicle

Preventing inadvertent opening
In situations where the tailgate should
not be opened with no-touch activation, en‐
sure that the remote control is located beyond
the range of the sensor, at least 5 ft/1.50 m
from the rear of the car.
Otherwise, the tailgate may be opened inad‐
vertently, for example by an unintentional or
misinterpreted movement of the foot.◀

Closing

With the foot motion, make sure there is
steady stance and do not touch the vehicle;
otherwise, there is a danger of injury, e. g. from
hot exhaust system parts.◀

Perform the foot movement described earlier.

1. Place in the center behind the vehicle,
about an arm's length from the vehicle rear.

When closing, the tailgate pivots back and
down.

2. Move a foot in the direction of travel as far
under the vehicle as possible and immedi‐
ately pull it back. With this movement, the
leg must pass through the ranges of both
sensors.

The closing of the tailgate has no effect on the
locking of the vehicle.

The hazard warning system flashes on and an
acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate
closes.

Another foot movement can interrupt the clos‐
ing operation.
Avoiding unintentional closing
In situations in which the opened tailgate
should not to be closed with no-touch activa‐
tion, ensure that the remote control is located
beyond the range of the sensor, at least
5 ft/1.50 m from the rear of the car.
Otherwise, the tailgate may be closed inadver‐
tently, for example by an unintentional or mis‐
interpreted movement of the foot.◀
Keep the closing path clear

Opening
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
The tailgate opens, regardless of whether it
was previously locked or unlocked.
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.
Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐
tem flashes.

Make sure that the closing path of the
tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐
sult.◀
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the tailgate is closed.◀

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Opening and closing

Controls

Malfunction

Tailgate

Remote control detection by the vehicle can
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
lowing circumstances:

Depending on optional features and country
version, this setting is not offered in some
cases.

▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 35.

1. "Settings"

▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmit power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 39.

2. "Doors/key"
3.

Select the symbol.

4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Tailgate"
Depending on your vehicle's optional
features, the tailgate is either unlocked
or opened.
▷ "Tailgate + door(s)"
Depending on your vehicle's optional
features, the tailgate is either unlocked
or opened and the doors unlocked.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle
The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
fer to page 35.
1. "Settings"

Adjusting

2. "Doors/key"

Unlocking

3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
mation signals.

The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
fer to page 35.

Doors

▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"

Automatic locking

1. "Settings"
2. "Doors/key"

The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
fer to page 35.

1. "Settings"

Select the symbol.

4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.

2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the desired function:
▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is
opened.
▷ "Lock after start driving"

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Opening and closing

The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.

Retrieving the seat and mirror settings
The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
used last are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions
are automatically retrieved if this function was
activated.
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
If this function is used, first make sure
that the footwell behind the driver's seat is
empty. Otherwise, people might get injured or
objects damaged when the seat is moved
back.◀
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐
ory is pressed.

Activating the setting

▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.

Arming and disarming the alarm
system
When you unlock or lock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐
cess, the alarm system is disarmed or armed at
the same time.

Door lock and armed alarm system
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the
door lock.

Tailgate and armed alarm system
The tailgate can be opened even when the
alarm system is armed.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again when the doors are locked.
The hazard warning system flashes once.

1. "Settings"

Panic mode

2. "Doors/key"

You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.

3. "Last seat position autom."

Alarm system

Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.

The concept
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system responds to:

Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
mirror

▷ Opening a door, the hood or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the car.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly signals tampering:
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.

▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Opening and closing

The system is armed.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:

Controls

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor

The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐
cured.

Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.

After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp
flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐
sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.

The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.

When the still open access is closed, inte‐
rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will
be switched on.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
ing:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is
towed.

Interior motion sensor
The windows and glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are turned off, until the vehicle is locked
again.

Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock vehicle with the remote control or
switch on the ignition, if needed through
emergency detection of remote control, re‐
fer to page 35.
▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying
the remote control on your person, grasp
the driver side or front passenger side door
handle completely.

Power windows
Hint
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐
not operate the power windows and injure
themselves.◀

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off together, such as in
the following situations:
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐
cles, at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Opening and closing

Opening

If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a
window closes, closing is interrupted.

▷

Press the button to the resistance
point.

The window reopens slightly.

The window opens while the switch is held.

Closing without the pinch protection
system

▷

Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stopse the motion.

See also: Convenient opening, refer to
page 37, via remote control.

Closing
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor closing and make sure that the
closing path of the window is clear; otherwise,
injuries may result.◀
▷

Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is
held.

▷

Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically. Pulling
again stops the motion.

See also: closing by means of Comfort Access,
refer to page 42.

Pinch protection system
Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐
tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
No window accessories
Do not install any accessories in the win‐
dow's range of movement; otherwise, the
pinch protection system will be impaired.◀
48

Keep the closing path clear
Monitor closing and make sure that the
closing path of the window is clear; otherwise,
injuries may result.◀
E.g. danger from the outside or ice might pre‐
vent window from closing properly - proceed
as follows:
1. Pull the reel past the resistance point and
hold it there.
The pinch protection is limited and the
window reopens slightly if the closing force
exceeds a certain margin.
2. Pull the reel past the resistance point again
within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.
The window closes without jam protection.

Safety switch
General information
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent children, e.g., from opening
and closing the rear windows using the
switches in the rear.

Switching on and off
Press button.
The LED lights up if the safety func‐
tion is switched on.
Safety switch for rear operation
Press the safety switch when transport‐
ing children in the rear; otherwise, injury may
result if the windows are closed without super‐
vision.◀

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Opening and closing

Glass sunroof, powered
General information
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
tion is switched on.
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor closing and make sure that the
closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; oth‐
erwise, injuries may result.◀
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐
not operate the glass sunroof and injure them‐
selves.◀

Controls

The glass sunroof closes as
long as the reel is held
down. The sliding visor can
be manually closed.
▷ Press the reel in the desired direction past
the resistance point.
The glass sunroof and sliding visor open
automatically.
The glass sunroof closes automatically.
The sliding visor can be manually closed.
Pressing the reel upward stops the motion.
Additional options:
▷ Convenient opening, refer to page 37, via
the remote control.
▷ Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer
to page 42.

Comfort position
If the glass sunroof is not automatically com‐
pletely opened, the comfort position has been
attained. In this position the wind noises in the
interior are the least.
If desired, continue the movement by pressing
the reel.

Tilting the glass sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
▷ The closed glass sunroof is
tilted.
▷ The opened glass sunroof
closes until it is in its tilted
position. The sliding visor
does not move.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor together
▷ Press the reel in the desired
direction to the resistance
point and hold it there.

Pinch protection system
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately
the middle of the opening in the roof, or from
the tilted position during closing.
The glass sunroof reopens slightly.
Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐
tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check
that the glass sunroof's closing path is clear;
otherwise, the closing action may not be inter‐
rupted in certain extreme situations, such as
when thin objects are present.◀

Glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor open together as long as
the reel is held down.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Opening and closing

Closing from the open position
without pinch protection

▷ The glass sunroof closes without jam pro‐
tection.

E. g. if there is an external danger, proceed as
follows:
1. Press the reel forward beyond the resist‐
ance point and hold.
The pinch protection is limited and the
glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain margin.
2. Press the reel forward again beyond the re‐
sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐
roof closes without jam protection. Make
sure that the closing area is clear.

Closing from the raised position
without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, push the reel for‐
ward past the resistance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes without jam protec‐
tion.

Initializing after a power failure
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
operated to a limited extent.

Initializing the system
The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
During the initialization, the glass sunroof
closes without jam protection.
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor closing and make sure that the
closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; oth‐
erwise, injuries may result.◀
Press the reel up and hold it until
the initialization is complete:
▷ Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is com‐
pleted when the glass sun‐
roof is completely closed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Adjusting

Controls

Adjusting
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

Keep the movement area unobstructed
When changing the seat position, keep
the seat's area of movement unobstructed;
otherwise, people might get injured or objects
damaged.◀

Middle seat
The 4 Series Gran Coupe is designed as a
4+1-seater vehicle.

Sitting safely

The middle seat is of limited usefulness. It is
recommended that this seat only be used by
persons who can use the backrest as a substi‐
tute for the head restraint.

The ideal seating position can make a vital
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.

Adjusting the head restraints, refer to
page 55.

The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:

Manually adjustable seats

▷ Safety belts, refer to page 54.

At a glance

▷ Head restraints, refer to page 55.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 98.

Seats
Hints
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐
ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected
movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle
control could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the
rear
Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear
while driving, or there is a risk of slipping under
the safety belt in the event of an accident. This
would eliminate the protection normally pro‐
vided by the belt.◀

Forward/backward

Thigh support

Seat tilt

Backrest width

Lumbar support

Height

Backrest tilt

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Adjusting

Forward/backward

Seat tilt

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.

Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired
tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat
engages properly.

After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐
ward or back slightly making sure it engages
properly.

Electrically adjustable seats
Height

At a glance

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.

Backrest tilt

Seat and mirror memory

Backrest width

Lumbar support

Backrest tilt

Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

General information

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the profile currently in use. When the vehi‐
cle is unlocked via the remote control, the po‐
sition is automatically retrieved if the Function,
refer to page 46, is activated for this purpose.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Adjusting

Adjustments in detail

Controls

Thigh support

1. Forward/back.

2. Height.

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.

Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch.
3. Seat tilt.

The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch.
The curvature is shifted up/
down.

Backrest width

4. Backrest tilt.

Change the width of the back‐
rest using the side wings to ad‐
just the lateral support.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Adjusting

Front seat heating

If the journey is continued within approx. 15
minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐
ically with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 175, is acti‐
vated, the heater output is reduced.

Switch off
Press button longer.
The LEDs go out.

Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the journey is continued within approx. 15
minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐
ically with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 175, is acti‐
vated, the heater output is reduced.

Switch off
Press button longer.
The LEDs go out.

Safety belts
Seats with safety belt
The vehicle has five seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.

General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off.
For the occupants' safety the belt locking
mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the
belt out of the holder when applying it.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.

Rear seat heating

▷ The two outer safety belt buckles,
integrated into the rear seat, are for pas‐
sengers sitting on the left and right.
▷ The center rear safety belt buckle is solely
intended for the center passenger.

Hints
One person per safety belt

Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.

Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or
small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀

The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
54

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Adjusting

Putting on the belt
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies
low around the hips in the lap area and does
not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt
can slip over the hips in a frontal impact and in‐
jure the abdomen.
The safety belt must not lie across the neck,
rub on sharp edges, be routed over breakable
objects, or be pinched.◀
What reduces the restraining effect
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull
the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the
tension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed;
otherwise, the belt can be damaged and the
restraining effect is reduced.◀
Using the middle safety belt
If the middle safety belt in the rear is
used, the larger side of the backrest must be
locked. Otherwise, the safety belt will not have
a restraining effect.◀

Buckling the belt

Controls

Safety belt reminder for driver's and
passenger's seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The
safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated
if objects are placed on the front passenger
seat.

Damage to safety belts
Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐
aged otherwise:
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
checked.
Check and replace safety belts
This should only be done by your service
center; otherwise, this safety feature might not
work properly.◀

Front headrests
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Adjust the head restraints of all occupied
seats properly; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.

Unbuckling the belt

Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.

1. Hold the belt firmly.

Distance

2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.

Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.

3. Guide the belt back into its roll-up mecha‐
nism.

If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting
the tilt of the backrest.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Adjusting

Adjusting the height

1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐
sistance.

▷ To raise: push.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
headrest down.

Tilt
Three different tilt positions are available.

2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐
straint out completely.
Before transporting passengers
Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀

Rear head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint

▷ Forward: pull the top edge of the head re‐
straint forward, arrow 1.
▷ Back: press the button, arrow 2. The head
restraint folds as far back as possible.

Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Adjust the head restraints of all occupied
seats properly; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀

Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Adjusting

Adjusting the height

Controls

Seat and mirror memory
Hints
Do not retrieve the memory while driving
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving, as an unexpected movement of the
seat could result in an accident.◀
Keep the movement area unobstructed

▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
headrest down.

When changing the seat position, keep
the seat's area of movement unobstructed;
otherwise, people might get injured or objects
damaged.◀

Removing

The concept

▷ To raise: push.

Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.

Two driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
can be stored per profile, refer to page 35, and
called up. Settings for the backrest width and
lumbar support are not stored in memory.

At a glance

1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐
sistance.
2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐
straint out completely.
Before transporting passengers
Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀

Storing
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3.

Press button. The LED in the but‐
ton lights up.

4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED
is lit. The LED goes out.
If the SET button is pressed accidentally:
Press button again.
The LED goes out.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Adjusting

Calling up settings

Note
Estimating distances correctly

Comfort function
1. Open the driver's door.
2. Switch off the ignition.
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.
The procedure stops when a reel for adjusting
the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you
see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk
of an accident.◀

At a glance

Safety mode
1. Close the driver's door or reel on the igni‐
tion.
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2
until the adjustment procedure is com‐
pleted.

Calling up of a seat position
deactivated

Adjusting 58

Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor

After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
tions is deactivated to save battery power.

Fold in and out 59

To reactivate calling up of a seat position:

Selecting a mirror

▷ Open or close the door or tailgate.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.

To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.

Adjusting electrically

Mirrors

The setting corresponds to the direc‐
tion in which the button is pressed.

Exterior mirrors

Saving positions

General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐
ror setting is stored for the profile currently in
use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐
mote control, the position is automatically re‐
trieved if this function is active.

Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 57.

Adjusting manually
In case of electrical malfunction press edges of
mirror.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Adjusting

Controls

Automatic Curb Monitor

Automatic dimming feature

The concept

Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐
med. Photocells are used to control the Interior
rearview mirror, refer to page 59.

If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g.

Turn knob

Activating
1.

Interior rearview mirror, manually
dimmable

Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.

2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror
position.

Fold in and out

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
the interior mirror.

Press button.
Possible at speeds up to approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
E. g. this is advantageous
▷ In car washes.

Interior rearview mirror, automatic
dimming feature
The concept

▷ In narrow streets.
▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
folded away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Before washing the car in an automatic
car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or
with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could
be damaged, depending on the width of the
vehicle.◀

Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.

Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirement
For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Adjusting

▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheel
Note
Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀

Adjusting

1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.

Steering wheel heating

Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Transporting children safely

Controls

Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

The right place for children
Note

Note

Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the
doors.◀

Children should always be in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back seat.
Transporting children in the rear

Deactivating the front-seat passenger
airbags
If a child restraint system is used in the front
passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐
senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐
bags are activated, even with a child restraint
system.◀

Installing child restraint
systems

Only transport children younger than
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in
the rear in child restraint systems provided in
accordance with the age, weight and size of
the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk
of injury in an accident.

Hints

Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight and size.◀

To select, mount and use child restraint sys‐
tems, observe the information provided by the
system manufacturer; otherwise, the protec‐
tive effect can be lost.◀

Children on the front passenger seat
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint system in the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
on the front passenger side are deactivated.
Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐
ger airbags, refer to page 100.

Manufacturer's information for child re‐
straint systems

Ensuring the stability of the child seat
When installing child restraint systems,
make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐
tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and
headrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐
justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that
all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise
the stability of the child seat can be affected,
and there is an increased risk of injury because

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Transporting children safely

of unexpected movement of the seat back‐
rest.◀

On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
Deactivating the front-seat passenger
airbags
If a child restraint system is used in the front
passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐
senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐
bags are activated, even with a child restraint
system.◀
After installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.

the adjustment after this; otherwise, the stabil‐
ity of the child seat will be reduced.◀
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.

Child seat security

Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
automatically, refer to page 100.

The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
ten child restraint systems.

Seat position and height

The front passenger safety belt can be perma‐
nently locked to fasten child restraint systems.

Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
ble and adjust its height to the highest and
thus best possible position for the belt and to
offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
dent.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐
til the best possible belt guide position is
reached.

1. Pull out the strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
3. Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it
tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.

Backrest width
Backrest width for the child seat
Before installing a child restraint system
in the front passenger seat, the backrest width
must be opened completely. Do not change

Locking the safety belt

2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the strap to be pulled in completely.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Transporting children safely

Controls

LATCH child restraint system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐
dren.

Before installing LATCH child
restraint systems

Note

Pull the belt away from the area of the child re‐
straint system.

Follow manufacturer's information for
LATCH child restraint systems
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint
systems, observe the operating and safety in‐
formation from the system manufacturer; oth‐
erwise, the level of protection may be re‐
duced.◀

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.

Note
Properly engage the lower LATCH an‐
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint
system is resting snugly against the backrest;
otherwise, the degree of protection may be re‐
duced.◀

Position
The corresponding symbol shows the
mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower anchors are
marked with a pair (2) of LATCH sym‐
bols. Use of inner lower anchors from
standard outboard LATCH positions to
install a child restraint system in the center is
not recommended. For the center position,
use the vehicle seat belt instead.

Assembly of LATCH child restraint
systems
1. Mount the child restraint system; refer to
the user's manual of the system.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.

Child restraint fixing system with a
tether strap
Mounting points
The respective symbol shows the an‐
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper Top Tether are
marked with this symbol. It can be found on
the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.

Note
Mounting eyelets
Use the mounting eyes only for the up‐
per retaining strap to secure child restraint
systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could
be damaged.◀

Retaining strap guide
Retaining strap
Make sure that the upper retaining strap
is not passed over the head restraints or sharp
edges and is not twisted up to the upper
mounting points; otherwise, the belt cannot
properly secure the child restraint system in an
accident.◀

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Transporting children safely

Locking the doors and
windows
Rear doors

Direction of travel

Head restraint

Hook for upper retaining strap

Mounting point/eye

Seat backrest

Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.

Upper retaining strap

The door can now be opened from the outside
only.

Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point

Safety switch for the rear

1. Raise the head restraint if needed.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between
the backrest and the cargo cover.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the mounting eye.

Press button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
rear.
This locks various functions so that they can‐
not be operated from the rear: safety switch,
refer to page 48.

5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving

Controls

Driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

Ignition off
Steptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stop
button again without stepping on the brake.
Manual transmission: Press the Start/Stop but‐
ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
P when the ignition is switched off

Start/Stop button
The concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off
and starts the engine.
Steptronic transmission: The
engine starts if the brakes are
stepped on while pressing the Start/Stop but‐
ton.
Manual transmission: The engine starts with
the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop
button is pressed.

P is engaged automatically when the ig‐
nition is switched off. When in an automatic car
wash, e.g., ensure that the ignition is not
switched off accidentally.◀
The ignition automatically cuts off while the
vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped:
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
low beams are activated.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started. This function is only available
when the low beams are turned off.

Ignition on

▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the low beams are turned off.

Steptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stop
button without stepping on the brake.

▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
with driver's door open and low beams off.

Manual transmission: Press the Start/Stop but‐
ton without stepping on the clutch pedal.

The low beams switch to parking lights after
approx. 15 minutes of no use.

All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator and warning lights in the
instrument cluster light up for a varied length
of time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.

Radio ready state
Activate radio-ready state:
▷ When the engine is running: press the
Start/Stop button.
Some electronic systems/power consumers
remain ready for operation.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Driving

The radio-ready state switches off automati‐
cally:
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐
tral locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
The radio-ready state remains active if, e.g.,
the ignition is automatically switched off for the
following reasons:
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
▷ When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights.
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
switched on, the system automatically
switches to the radio-ready state if the lights
are turned off or, if correspondingly equipped,
the daytime running lights are activated.

Repeated starting in quick succession
Avoid trying to start the vehicle repeat‐
edly and in quick succession. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned,
posing a risk of overheating and damage to the
catalytic converter.◀
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at
moderate engine speeds.

Steptronic transmission
Starting the engine
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
gine starts.

Manual transmission
Starting the engine

Starting the engine
Hints

1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐
tral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Enclosed areas
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may
lead to loss of consciousness and death. The
exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an
odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀
Unattended vehicle
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with
the engine running; doing so poses a risk of
danger.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐
mission in selector lever position P or N to pre‐
vent the vehicle from moving.◀

The ignition is activated automatically for a
certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
gine starts.

Engine stop
Hints
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐
not start the engine.◀
Apply parking brake and further secure
the vehicle if needed.
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving

and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐
hicle, e.g., by turning the steering wheel in the
direction of the curb.◀

Controls

is available when the vehicle is traveling faster
than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.

Engine stop
Before driving into a car wash
So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐
serve instructions for going into an automatic
car wash, refer to page 224.

Steptronic transmission
Switching off the engine
1. Engage selector lever position P with the
vehicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.

The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
ing a stop under the following conditions:
Steptronic transmission:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the
vehicle is stopped.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
Manual transmission:
▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is
not pressed.

3. Set the parking brake.

▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.

Manual transmission

The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.

Switching off the engine
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
Start/Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.

Auto Start/Stop function
The concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
engine starts again automatically for driving
off.

Automatic mode
After every start of the engine using the Start/
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
the last selected state, refer to page 68.
When the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it

Displays in the instrument cluster
The READY display in the tach‐
ometer signals that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.

Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ External temperature too low.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated
or cooled to the required level.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Driving

▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐
ature.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ The selector lever is in position N, M/S or
R.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.

Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ Steptronic transmission:
By releasing the brake pedal.
▷ Manual transmission:
The clutch pedal is pressed.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Functional limitations
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior
when the cooling function is switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
lector lever position D to R, N or M/S.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
lector lever position P to N, D, R or M/S.
▷ The vehicle begins rolling.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
the heating is switched on.
▷ Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc‐
cur, e.g., if the brake pedal is depressed a
number of times in succession.

Activating/deactivating the system
manually
Using the button

Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met.
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
length of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.

Press button.
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving

▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is
activated.

Controls

Releasing

Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, e. g., when
leaving it.
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐
matically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.

Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons
as if the driver were absent.

Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked.

Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide
the lever down.

Hints
Use while driving
On rare occasions if it is necessary to use
the parking brake while driving, do not use ex‐
cessive force when applying it. When using it,
keep the button on the lever depressed.
Otherwise, using excessive force when apply‐
ing the parking brake may cause the rear
wheels to lock, resulting in fishtailing.◀
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac‐
tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically
while coasting, if traffic conditions permit.
The brake lights will not light up if the parking
brake is set.

Parking brake
Applying
The lever automatically engages after being
pulled up.
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models

Turn signal, high beams,
headlight flasher
Turn signal
Hints
Do not adjust the exterior mirrors
Do not adjust the exterior mirror while
driving and when turn signals/hazard warning
flashers are on, or else the additional turn sig‐
nal lights in the exterior mirror are out of posi‐
tion and can't be seen.◀

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Driving

Using turn signals

High beams, headlight flasher

Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

▷ High beams, arrow 1.

To switch off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.

▷ Headlight flasher, arrow 2.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

Washer/wiper system

Triple turn signal activation

Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe

Press the lever to the resistance point.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated.
On the Control Display:

Do not activate wipers if frozen to wind‐
shield
Do not switch on the wipers if they are frozen
to the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades
and the wiper motor may be damaged.◀

1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.

Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.

Hints

Do not activate wipers on dry windshield
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is
dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or
cause them to become worn more quickly.◀
Do not activate wipers with wipers folded
away
Do not switch on the wipers if they are folded
away, otherwise the hood or the wipers may be
damaged.◀

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving

Switching on

Controls

Interval mode or rain sensor
The concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐
ror.

Activating/deactivating
Push wiper lever up.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Normal wiper speed: push up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiper speed: press up twice or press
once beyond the resistance point.
Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐
hicle comes to standstill.

Switch off and brief wipe

Press button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped
with a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up.
When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper
operation is deactivated.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise, un‐
intentional wiping can cause damages.◀

Push wiper lever down.

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor

The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Single wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down
once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Turn the thumbwheel.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Driving

Clean the windshield, headlights

Folding wipers back down
Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; other‐
wise, the wipers may become damaged when
they are activated.◀
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers move to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.

Pull the wiper lever towards you.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐
lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐
vated.
Do not use the washer system at freezing
temperatures
Do not use the washers if fluid could freeze
onto the windshield which might impede your
viewing field. Therefore use antifreeze fluid.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
empty; operation might damage pump.◀

Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.

Fold-out position of the wipers
Fold wipers back when you want to change the
blades or with pending low temperatures.
1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. With icy conditions make sure that blades
are not frozen to the windshield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly
vertical position.

Washer fluid
Hints
Antifreeze for washer fluid
Antifreeze is flammable and can cause
injury if it is used incorrectly.
Therefore, keep it away from possible sources
of ignition.
Only keep it in the closed original container
and inaccessible to children.
Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐
tainer.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐
centrate or the equivalent.◀
Adding washer fluid
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
cool, and then close the cover completely to
avoid contact between the washer fluid and
hot engine parts.
Otherwise, there is a danger of fire and a risk to
personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀

After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving

Washer fluid reservoir

Controls

Steptronic transmission
Selector lever positions
D Drive
Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
automatically.

R is Reverse
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir.
Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐
centrate and tap water and – if required – with a
washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐
turer's recommendations.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the
right mixture.
Do not add windshield washer concentrate and
antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure
water; this could damage the wiper system.
Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐
ferent manufacturers because they can clog
the windshield washer nozzles.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Manual transmission
Shifting
Shifting into 5th or 6th gear
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push
the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise, inad‐
vertent shifting into 3rd or 4th gear could lead
to engine damage.◀

Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
To overcome the resistance push the selector
lever dynamically to the left and engage the re‐
verse gear.

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral:
The vehicle may roll. Use in automatic car
washes, e.g.
When the ignition is switched off, refer to
page 65, selector lever position P is engaged
automatically.

P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
▷ After the engine is switched off when the
vehicle is in radio-ready state, refer to
page 65, or when the ignition is switched
off, refer to page 65, and when selector
lever position R or D is set.
▷ With the ignition off, if selector lever posi‐
tion N is set.
▷ If the driver's safety belt is released, the
driver's door is opened, and the brake
pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is
stationary and selector lever position D or
R is set.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐
lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐
hicle may begin to move.

Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Step on the accelerator pedal

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Driving

beyond the resistance point at the full throttle
position.

Engaging selector lever positions

▷ Shift out of P.

Engaging P

Press on the brake pedal until you start
driving
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake
pedal until you are ready to start.◀
▷ It is not possible to shift out of selector
lever position P until the engine is running
and the brake is applied.
▷ With the vehicle is stationary, press on the
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be
executed: shift lock.

Press button P.

Sport program and manual mode
Activating the sport program

Engaging D, R and N

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
rection, beyond a resistance point if needed.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to
its center position.

Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐
tor lever position D.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.

Activating the M/S manual mode
1. Press the selector lever to the left out of
selector lever position D.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
Press unlock button, in order to:

The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1.

▷ Engage R.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving

Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S
manual mode is automatically upshifted as
needed.

Controls

Shift paddles

Switching to manual mode
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, for example downshifting is
not possible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the currently se‐
lected gear.

Steptronic Sport transmission:
prevent automatic upshifting in M/S
manual mode
The Steptronic Sport transmission does not
automatically upshift in M/S manual mode
once the maximum speed is reached, if one of
the following conditions is met:
▷ DSC deactivated.
▷ TRACTION activated.
▷ SPORT+ activated.
In addition, the kickdown is deactivated.

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▷ With the respective transmission version,
the lowest possible gear can be selected
by pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, for example downshifting is
not possible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the
transmission temporarily switches to manual
mode.

With the respective transmission version, the
lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐
taneously operating the kickdown and the left
shift paddle. However, this effect is not pro‐
duced via the shift paddles when switching
briefly from D to manual mode.

If the selector lever is still in selector lever po‐
sition D with the respective transmission ver‐
sion, it is possible to switch back into the auto‐
matic mode:

Ending the sport program/manual
mode

▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift
paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.

Push the selector lever to the right.

In the manual mode, after conservative driving
for a certain amount of time or if there has
been no acceleration or shifting of the shift
paddles within a certain amount of time, the
transmission switches back to automatic
mode.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
Or

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Driving

Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, e.g.: P.

Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock
General information
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from the danger area.
Unlocking is possible, if the started can spin
the engine.

Engaging selector lever position N
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter
must audibly start.
3. Press and hold the selector lever into posi‐
tion N.
A corresponding Check Control message
is displayed.
4. Press the selector lever again into posi‐
tion N within approx. 6 seconds.
Position N is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter
stops.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.

Steptronic Sport transmission:
Launch Control
The concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction.

Hints
Component wear
Do not use Launch Control too often;
otherwise, this may result in premature wear of
components due to the high stress placed on
the vehicle.◀
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 168, period.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.

Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.

Start with launch control
While the engine is running:
1.

Press button or select Sport+ with
the Driving Dynamics Control.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF
lights up.

2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full
throttle position.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐
mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving

Controls

Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding
conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used
again.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Displays

Displays
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

Overview, instrument cluster

Fuel gauge 82

Engine oil temperature 82

Speedometer

Current fuel consumption

Messages, e.g. Check Control

Electronic displays 78

Tachometer 82

Reset miles 83

Electronic displays
▷ Selection lists, refer to page 87.

▷ Date, refer to page 83.

▷ External temperature, refer to page 83.

▷ Energy recovery, refer to page 84.

▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 67.

▷ Transmission display, refer to page 76.

▷ On-board computer, refer to page 87.

▷ Miles/trip miles, refer to page 83.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Displays

▷ Messages, e.g. Check Control, refer to
page 79.

Red lights

▷ Current fuel consumption, refer to
page 84.

Safety belt reminder

▷ Navigation display, see User's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
▷ Range, refer to page 83.
▷ Status, Driving Dynamics Control, refer to
page 122.
▷ Service requirements, refer to page 84.
▷ Speed limit detection, refer to page 86.
▷ Time, refer to page 83.

Controls

Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on
the driver or passenger side is not
buckled. The safety belt reminder can
also be activated if objects are placed on the
front passenger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
defective.

Check Control

Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐
ice center immediately.

The concept

Parking brake, brake system

The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a
text message may appear on the Control Dis‐
play.

Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐
nations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

For additional information, refer to Re‐
lease parking brake, refer to page 69.

Front-end collision warning
Illuminated: advance warning is issued,
e.g., when there is the impending dan‐
ger of a collision or the distance to the
vehicle ahead is too small.
Increase distance.
Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan‐
ger of a collision when the vehicle approaches
another vehicle at a relatively high differential
speed.
Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐
neuver.
Pedestrian warning
Symbol in the instrument cluster.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Displays

If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, the symbol lights up and a signal
sounds.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
Control is activated

Orange lights
Active Cruise Control
The number bars shows the selected
distance from the vehicle driving
ahead.
For additional information, refer to Active
Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC,
refer to page 125.
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
Illuminated: vehicle driving ahead de‐
tected.
Flashing: the conditions are not ade‐
quate for operating the system.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.

Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Avoid abrupt braking if possible. Brak‐
ing force boost in some cases defec‐
tive. Stop carefully. Take into account
longer brake travel. Have this checked
by the service center immediately.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
Flashing: DSC controls the drive and
braking forces. The vehicle is stabi‐
lized. Reduce speed and adapt driving
profile to the driving circumstances.
Illuminated: DSC failed. Have the system
checked by the service center.

For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC, refer to page 120.

Dynamic Stability Control DSC is
switched off or Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol DTC is switched on.
For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control, refer to page 120, and Dy‐
namic Traction Control, refer to page 121.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cau‐
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐
neuvers.
For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐
fer to page 105.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor
signals a loss of tire inflation pressure
in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no
flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be
detected.
▷ Interference through systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
▷ TPM could not conclude the reset: perform
the reset of the system again.
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
have the service center check it if needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
your service center.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Displays

For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor, refer to page 101.

Controls

Front fog lights
Front fog lights are activated.
For additional information, refer to
Front fog lights, refer to page 96.

Steering system
Steering system in some cases defec‐
tive.

High-beam Assistant

Have the steering system checked by
the service center.
Engine functions

High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are activated and off auto‐
matically as a function of the traffic sit‐
uation.

Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐
ice center.
For additional information, refer to Onboard Diagnostics socket, refer to page 208.

For additional information, refer to High-beam
Assistant, refer to page 95.
Cruise control
The system is switched on. It maintains
the speed that was set using the con‐
trol elements on the steering wheel.

Lane departure warning
System is switched on and under cer‐
tain circumstances warns if a detected
lane is left without flashing beforehand.

Blue lights

For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐
ture warning, refer to page 115.

High beams
High beams are activated.

Green lights

For additional information, refer to High
beams, refer to page 70.

Turn signal
Turn signal on.

General lamps

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.

Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored. The symbol is
shown in the display of the instrument

For additional information, refer to Turn signal,
refer to page 69.
cluster.
Parking lights, headlight control
Parking lights or headlights are acti‐
vated.
For additional information, refer to
Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, re‐
fer to page 93.

Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol
in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐
trol message and the meaning of the indicator
and warning lights.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Displays

Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display.

Depending on the Check Control message, the
following functions can be selected.
"Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about the
Check Control message in the Integrated
Owner's Manual.
▷

Displaying stored Check Control
messages
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"

Symbols

▷

They are stored and can be displayed
again later.

"Service request"

2. "Vehicle status"
3.

"Check Control"

4. Select the text message.

Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after the ignition is switched
off.

Contact your service center.
▷

"Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.

Hiding Check Control messages

Fuel gauge
Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary.
Depending on the equipment
version, the arrow beside the
fuel pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Hints on refueling, refer to page 184.

Tachometer
Press the onboard computer button on the
turn signal lever.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared
until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐
eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐
sages are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be faded for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
▷ Other Check Control messages are faded
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.

Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐
rupted to protect the engine.

Engine oil temperature
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine
and vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Displays

middle or in the left half of
the temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
the temperature range. A Check Control
message is also displayed.

Coolant temperature
If the coolant along with the engine becomes
too hot, a Check Control message is displayed.

Controls

Ice on roads
Even at temperatures above
+37 ℉/+3 ℃, roads might be icy.
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and
shaded roads, e.g., to avoid the increased risk
of an accident.◀

Time
The time is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.

Check the coolant level, refer to page 206.

Setting the time and time for‐
mat, refer to page 90.

Odometer and trip odometer
Date

Display
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.

The date is displayed in the
computer.

▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.

Setting the date and date for‐
mat, refer to page 90.

Show/reset kilometers
Press the knob.
▷ When the ignition is
switched off, the time, the
external temperature and
the odometer are displayed.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.

External temperature
If the indicator drops to
+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal
sounds.
A Check Control message is
displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

Range
Display
With a low remaining range:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is
shown on the on-board co‐
mupter.
▷ With a dynamic driving style - e.g., taking
curves aggressively - engine operation
might vary.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range of
30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail
and damage might occur.◀

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Displays

Displaying the cruising range

Energy recovery

Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the range can also be displayed as bar in the
instrument cluster.

Display
The kinetic energy of the vehicle
is converted to electrical energy
while coasting. The vehicle bat‐
tery is partially charged and fuel
consumption can be reduced.

1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "Additional indicators"

Current fuel consumption
Instrument cluster
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. Check whether you
are currently driving in an effi‐
cient and environmentallyfriendly manner.

Instrum. cluster with enhanced
features
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. Check whether you
are currently driving in an effi‐
cient and environmentallyfriendly manner.

Service requirements
The concept
After the ignition is turned on the instrument
cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐
nance.
Your service specialist can read the current
service requirements from your remote con‐
trol.

Display
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐
cally transmitted to your service center before
a service due date.

Displaying the current fuel
consumption

Detailed information on service
requirements

1. "Settings"

More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.

2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "Additional indicators"
The bar display for the current fuel consump‐
tion is displayed in the instrument cluster.

On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.

"Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.

4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Displays

Gear shift indicator

Symbols
Sym‐
bols

Controls

Description

The concept

No service is currently required.

The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear for the current driving situation.

The deadline for scheduled mainte‐
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
tion is approaching.

Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐
try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐
tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐
tronic transmission and with manual
transmission.

The service deadline has already
passed.

Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.

Manual transmission: displaying
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.

Symbol

Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.

Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.

On the Control Display:

Shift up to fuel efficient gear.

1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.

Shift down to fuel efficient gear.

"Service required"

4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"

Shift into neutral.

6. Adjust the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.

Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐
cally transmitted to your service center before
a service due date.
You can check when your service center was
notified.

Steptronic transmission: displays
Example

Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.

Shift into fuel efficient gear.

On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Displays

Speed limit detection

Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

The concept
Switching on/off

Speed limit detection
Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the
shape of a traffic sign to display the currently
detected speed limit. The camera in the area of
the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs
at the edge of the road as well as variable over‐
head sign posts. Traffic signs with extra sym‐
bols for wet road conditions, etc. are also de‐
tected and compared with the vehicle's
onboard data, such as for the rain sensor, and
will be displayed depending on the situation.
The system takes into account the information
stored in the navigation system and also dis‐
plays speed limits present on routes without
signs.

On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "Speed limit information"
If speed limit detection is switched on, it can
be displayed on the info display in the instru‐
ment cluster via the computer.

Display
The following is displayed in the instrument
cluster:

Speed limit detection
Current speed limit.

Hints
Personal judgment
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic
situation.
The system assists the driver and does not re‐
place the human eye.◀

At a glance

Speed limit detection is not
available.

Speed limit detection can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.

Camera

System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are concealed by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
The camera is found near the interior rearview
mirror.

▷ When driving toward bright lights.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Displays

▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered by a sticker, etc.

Controls

Display

▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.

Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the list in the instrument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.

Activating a list and adjusting the
setting

Selection lists in the
instrument cluster
The concept
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the following can be displayed or operated us‐
ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the
steering wheel as well as the displays in the in‐
strument cluster and the Head-up Display:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.

On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
list.
Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐
ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel.

▷ Turn on voice activation system.
It also displays programs of the Driving Dy‐
namics Control.

On-board computer
Indication in the info display
The information from the com‐
puter is shown in the info display
in the instrument cluster.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Displays

Calling up information on the info
display

On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. Select the desired displays.

Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
Press the onboard computer button on the
turn signal lever.

It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km.

Information is displayed in the info display of
the instrument cluster.

If there is only enough fuel left for less than
45 miles/80 km, the color of the display
changes.

Information at a glance

Average fuel consumption

Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn
signal lever calls up the following information in
the info display:
▷ Range.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Average speed.

The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the period while the engine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
on-board comupter.

Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped are not included in
the calculation of the average speed.

▷ Date.
▷ Speed limit detection.
▷ Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.

Adjusting the info display
Depending on the vehicle equipment version,
you can select what information from the com‐
puter is to be displayed on the info display of
the instrument cluster.

Resetting average values
Press and hold the onboard computer button
on the turn signal lever.

Distance to destination
The distance remaining to the destination is
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
gation system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Displays

Time of arrival

Controls

3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"

The estimated time of arrival is
displayed if a destination is en‐
tered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.

Speed limit detection
Description of the speed limit detection, refer
to page 86, function.

4. "Yes"

Sport displays
The concept
On the Control Display, the current values for
performance and torque can be displayed if
the vehicle is appropriately equipped.

Trip computer

Displaying sport displays on the
Control Display

The vehicle features two types of board com‐
puters.

1. "Vehicle info"

▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary.
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an
overview of the current trip.

Resetting the trip computer
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle came to a
standstill.

2. "Sport displays"

Speed warning
The concept
Displays a speed, when reached, should cause
a warning to be issued.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
drops below the set speed once by at least
3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the
speed warning
On the Control Display:

Display on the Control Display

1. "Settings"

Display the computer or trip computer on the
Control Display.

2. "Speed"

1. "Vehicle info"

4. Turn the controller until the desired speed
is displayed.

2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the fuel consumption or
speed

3. "Warning at:"

5. Press the controller.
Speed warning is stored.

On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info"

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Displays

Activating/deactivating the speed
warning

6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.

On the Control Display:

7. Press the controller.

1. "Settings"

The time is stored.

2. "Speed"

Setting the time format

3. "Warning"

1. "Settings"

4. Press the controller.

2. "Time/Date"

Setting your current speed as the
speed warning

3. "Format:"

On the Control Display:

The time format is stored.

1. "Settings"

4. Select the desired format.

Automatic time setting

2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
speed warning.

Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Auto time set"

Settings on the Control
Display

Date
Setting the date

Time

1. "Settings"

Setting the time zone

2. "Time/Date"

1. "Settings"

3. "Date:"

2. "Time/Date"

4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.

3. "Time zone:"
4. Select the desired time zone.

5. Press the controller.

The time zone is stored.

6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.

Setting the time

The date is stored.

1. "Settings"

Setting the date format

2. "Time/Date"

1. "Settings"

3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
5. Press the controller.

2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Displays

Language

Controls

Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.

Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:

Assist system information

1. "Settings"

Display on the Control Display

2. "Language/Units"

Information on the Assist system can be dis‐
played by activating Assist on the Control Dis‐
play.

3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.

Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 28.

Units of measure

1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Driver assistance info"

Head-up Display
The concept

Setting the units of measure
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
distance and temperature:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.

This system projects important information
into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.

Brightness

The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road.

Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:

Display visibility

1. "Settings"

The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following factors:

2. "Control display"

▷ Certain sitting positions.

3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.

▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Displays

If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐
tings.

When the low beams are activated, the bright‐
ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐
ally influenced using the instrument lighting.

Switching on/off

Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.

1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"

Adjusting the height

3. "Head-Up Display"

On the Control Display:

Display

1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"

Overview

3. "Height"

▷ Speed.

4. Turn the controller.

▷ Navigation system.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.

Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.

▷ Driver assistance systems.

Setting the rotation

Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.

On the Control Display:

Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display

2. "Head-Up Display"

On the Control Display:

4. Turn the controller.

1. "Settings"

Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.

2. "Head-Up Display"

1. "Settings"
3. "Rotation"

3. "Displayed information"

Special windshield

4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.

The windshield is part of the system.

Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.

Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.

The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
ages from being displayed.
Therefore, have the special windshield re‐
placed by a service center only.

The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Lights

Controls

Lights
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

Parking lights/low beams,
headlight control
General information
Position of switch:

If the driver door is opened with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off at these switch settings.

Parking lights
Position of switch
: the vehicle's lights
light up on all sides, e.g., for parking.

Overview

Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
and it would then be impossible to start the en‐
gine.
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lights, refer to
page 94.

Low beams
with the ignition
Position of switch
switched on: the low beams light up.

Rear fog lights

Front fog lights

Depending on the equipment: automatic
headlight control, Adaptive Light Control,
High-beam Assistant, Welcome lights,
Daytime running lights

Welcome lights
When the vehicle is parked, leave the switch in
position
or
: parking and interior lights
come on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked
depending on the ambient brightness.

Lights off, daytime running lights

Parking lights, daytime running lights

Depending on the equipment: low beams,
welcome lights, High-beam Assistant

On the Control Display:

Instrument lighting

1. "Settings"

Activating/deactivating

2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome lights"
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Lights

Headlight courtesy delay feature

Activating/deactivating

The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlight flasher is switched on after the radioready state is switched off.

In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
On the Control Display:

Setting the duration

1. "Settings"

On the Control Display:

2. "Lighting"

1. "Settings"

3. "Daytime running lamps"

2. "Lighting"

Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.

3. "Pathway lighting:"
4. Set length of time.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.

Roadside parking lights

Automatic headlight control
Position of switch
: the low beams are acti‐
vated and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in
twilight or if there is precipitation. The indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
When emerging from a tunnel during the day,
the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.

Switching on

The low beams always stay on when the fog
lights are activated.

With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.

Personal responsibility
The automatic headlight control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐
ment in determining when to turn the lights on
in response to ambient lighting conditions.
E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or
hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under
these conditions, you should always switch on
the lights manually.◀

Daytime running lights
With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐
ning lights light up in position
,
or
. After the ignition is switched off, the park‐
ing lights light up in position
.

Switch off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.

Adaptive Light Control
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows
the course of the road.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Lights

In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
when turning, one of the two front fog lights is
switched on as a turning lamp. As a result the
inside of the curve is better lighted.

Controls

fore, manually reel off the high beams in situa‐
tions where required to avoid a safety risk.◀

Activating

Activating
Position of switch
switched on.

with the ignition

To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
The turning lights are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
When driving in reverse, the turning lights may
be automatically switched on regardless of the
steering angle.

Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.

High-beam Assistant
The concept
When the low beams are activated, this system
automatically switches the high beams on and
off or suppresses the light in the areas that
blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐
trolled by a camera on the front of the interior
rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the
high beams are activated whenever the traffic
situation allows. The driver can intervene at
any time and switch the high beams non and
off as usual.

1. Depending on the equipment, turn the light
switch into position
or
.
2. Press button on the turn signal lever, ar‐
row.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐
tomatically brightened or dimmed.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams. Depend‐
ing on the version of the system in the vehicle,
the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐
ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the
areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case,
the blue indicator light will stay on.

Note
Personal responsibility
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve
as a substitute for the driver's personal judg‐
ment of when to use the high beams. There‐

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Lights

Switching the high beams on and off
manually

Fog lights
Front fog lights
The low beams must be switched on.
Press button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to
page 94, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the front
fog lights.

▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off
when manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐
vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐
ton on the turn signal lever.

When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.

Instrument lighting
Adjusting

System limits
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on freeways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ At low speeds.

The parking lights or low beams
must be switched on to adjust
the brightness.
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.

Interior lights
General information
The interior lights, footwell lights, access lights
and courtesy lights are controlled automati‐
cally.
Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐
trols brightness of some of these features.

▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Lights

Overview

Controls

Setting the brightness
The brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐
justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting or on the Control Display.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.

Interior lights

Reading lamp

Switching the interior lights on and off
Press button.
To reel off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.

Reading lights
Press button.
Reading lights are located at the front and rear
next to the interior lights.

Ambient light
Depending on your optional features lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the interior.

Selecting color scheme
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Ambient:"
4. Select desired setting.
With a color scheme selected and welcome
lights activated they illuminate in the line's
color when vehicle is unlocked.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Safety

Safety
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

Airbags

Front airbag, driver

Side airbag

Front airbag, front passenger

Knee airbags

Head airbag

Front airbags

Side airbags

Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate restraint.

In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbags
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Safety

Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side
impact events.

Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.

Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on how to ensure the optimal
protective effect of the airbags
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to
keep the risk of injury to your hands or
arms as low as possible when the airbag is
triggered.
▷ There should be no person, animals, or ob‐
jects between an airbag and a person.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS
devices or' mobile phones.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries
might occur when front airbag is activated.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.

Controls

▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not rest
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries
might occur when airbag is activated.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
modify them in any way.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars
and the sides of the roofliner.◀
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
Malfunction, deactivation and after de‐
ploying the airbags
Do not touch the individual components imme‐
diately after the system has been triggered;
otherwise, you may risk burns.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
the service center or an authorized repair shop
for handling explosives.
Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or
unintentional activation of the airbag - both
may lead to injury.◀
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbag
system
When the ignition is reel on, the warn‐
ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights
up briefly and thereby indicates the op‐

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

Safety

erational readiness of the entire airbag system
and the belt tensioner.

In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator lamp goes out.

Airbag system malfunctioning

If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.

▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
In case of a malfunction have airbag sys‐
tem checked immediately.
In case of a malfunction have airbag system
checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk
that the system does not function as expected
in case of a severe accident.◀

Automatic deactivation of the frontseat passenger airbags
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐
sistance.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐
vated.

To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically recommended
by your vehicle's manufacturer.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags

Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger
keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise,
proper functioning of the front passenger air‐
bag might not be assured.◀
Child restraint fixing system in the front
passenger seat
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.◀

Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.

100

The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐
ger airbags indicates the operating state of the
front-seat passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
ther activated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system or when the seat
is empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Safety

size is detected on the seat. The airbags
on the front passenger side are activated.

Detected child seats
The system generally detects children seated
in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐
quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu‐
factured. After installing a child seat, make
sure that the indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates
that the child seat has been detected and the
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and front-seat
passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front passenger's airbags very much depends
on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐
er's seat.
With a respective message appearing on Con‐
trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep
the accuracy of this function over the longterm.

Calibrating the front seats
A corresponding message appears on the
Control Display.
1. Press the reel and move the respective
seat all the way forward.
2. Press the reel forward again. The seat still
moves forward slightly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disap‐
pears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
soon as possible.

Controls

Unobstructed area of movement
Ensure that the area of movement of the
seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury
or damage to objects.◀

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
the four mounted tires. The system warns you
if there is a significant loss of pressure in one
or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the
tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure
and tire temperature.

Hints
Tire damage due to external factors
Sudden tire damage caused by external
circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐
vance.◀
With use of the system observe further infor‐
mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐
fer to page 188.

Functional requirements
The system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐
ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is
not assured.
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.

Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

101

Controls

Safety

2. "Vehicle status"

On the Control Display and on the vehicle:

1. "Vehicle info"

"Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"

The status is displayed.

2. "Vehicle status"

Status control display
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a text message on the
Control Display.

"Perform reset"

4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure:"Perform
reset".
6. Drive away.

All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning rela‐
tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during
the last reset.

One wheel is yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.

All wheels are yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires.

Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons
for this may be:
▷ The system is being reset.
▷ Malfunction.

Status information
The status control display additionally shows
the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐
pending on the model, tire temperatures. It
shows the actual values read; they may vary
depending on driving style or weather condi‐
tions.

The tires are shown in gray and the status is
displayed.
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The reset is
completed automatically while driving.
After a successfully completed Reset, the
wheels on the Control Display are shown in
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
active" is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue the reset resumes automatically.

Low tire pressure message
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
The system therefore issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures before
the last reset.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
regular tires or run-flat tires.

Carry out reset
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.

102

Run-flat tires, refer to page 196, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Safety

Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC
Dynamic Stability Control.

Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
The tire pressure gage of the Mobility Sys‐
tem, refer to page 196, can possibly be
used for this purpose.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is shown to be correct, it is possible that
the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform
a reset. Then perform the reset.
If an identification is not possible, please
contact the service center.
2. Fixing a flat tire, where applicable with the
Mobility System.
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System,
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In
this case, have the electronics checked at the
next opportunity and have them replaced if
needed.

Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.

Controls

3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is shown to be correct, it is possible that
the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform
a reset. In that case, carry out a reset.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐
ing style and road conditions.
A vehicle with an average load has a possible
driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐
ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during
braking, a longer braking distance and different
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐
ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Your car handles differently when you lose tire
inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re‐
duced when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving
can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
could come loose and cause an accident. Do
not continue driving and contact your service
center.◀

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

103

Controls

Safety

Required tire inflation pressure check
message

▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.

A Check Control message is displayed in the
following situations

▷ Interference through systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.

▷ The system has detected a wheel change,
but no reset was done.
▷ Inflation was not carried out according to
specifications.
▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below
the level of the last confirmation.
In this case:
▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire
change.

System limits
The system does not function properly if a re‐
set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is
reported though tire inflation pressures are
correct.
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the
sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus
increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire
inflation pressure is reduced when the tire
temperature falls again. These circumstances
may cause a warning when temperatures fall
very sharply.

Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. No flat
tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐
tected.
Display in the following situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
have the service center check it if needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
your service center.

104

Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
tor is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Safety

sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.

FTM Flat Tire Monitor

The status is displayed.

Initialization
When initializing the once set inflation tire
pressures serve as reference values in order to
detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.

"Perform reset"

4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".

The concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
tween the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. This will be
detected and reported as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.

Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.

Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
whether or not the FTM is active.
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.

Controls

6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.

Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
inflation pressure.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
regular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 196, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀

"Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

105

Controls

Safety

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on if needed.

Run-flat tires
Maximum speed

System limits

You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external circumstances cannot be recognized
in advance.◀

Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all
four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
check the tire inflation pressure regularly.

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.

The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:

3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.

▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.

Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
The tire pressure gage of the Mobility Sys‐
tem, refer to page 196, can possibly be
used for this purpose.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
If an identification is not possible, please
contact the service center.
2. Fix the flat tire where applicable using the
Mobility System, refer to page 196.

106

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐
ing style and road conditions.
A vehicle with an average load has a possible
driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐
ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during
braking, a longer braking distance and different
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐
ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Safety

Your car handles differently when you lose tire
inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re‐
duced when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving
can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
could come loose and cause an accident. Do
not continue driving and contact your service
center.◀

Controls

Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk
of an accident.◀
Tow-starting and towing
For tow-starting or towing, switch off the
Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐
tions of the individual braking systems might
lead to accidents.◀

At a glance

Intelligent Safety

Button in the vehicle

The concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐
telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐
tems that can help prevent a imminent colli‐
sion. These systems are active automatically
every time the engine is started using the
Start/Stop button:
▷ Front-end collision warning, refer to
page 108.
▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 113.

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

Hints
Personal responsibility
The system does not serve as a substi‐
tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
traffic situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐
dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀
Adapting your speed and driving style
The displays and warnings of the system
do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to
adapt his or her driving speed and style to the
traffic conditions.◀

The camera is found near the interior rearview
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

107

Controls

Safety

Switching on/off

General information

The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure.

The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
the current driving situation.

Press button: the systems are turned
off. The LED goes out.
Press button: the systems are turned on. The
LED lights up.
Settings can be made on the Control Display.

Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.

Detection range

Front-end collision warning
Depending on the equipment, the collision
warning system consists of one of the two sys‐
tems:
▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐
ing function, refer to page 108.
▷ Front-end collision warning with braking
function, refer to page 110

Front-end collision warning
with City Braking function
The concept
The ystem can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently if needed.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
A camera in the area of the rearview mirror
controls the system.
The front-end collision warning is available
even if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally the collision warning is delayed
avoiding false alarm.

108

It responds to objects if they are detected by
the system.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Safety

Tow-starting and towing
For tow-starting or towing, switch off the
Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐
tions of the individual braking systems might
lead to accidents.◀

At a glance

Controls

Switch off
Press button: the system is switched
off. The LED goes out.
Re-press button: the system is switched on.
The LED lights up.

Setting the warning time

Button in the vehicle

The warning time can be set via iDrive.
1. "Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired time on the Control
Display.
The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐
rently in use.

Warning with braking function
Intelligent Safety button

Display
If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐
nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐
ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.

Camera

Symbol Measure
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐
ing.
Brake and increase distance.
The vehicle flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐
ing.
The camera is found near the interior rearview
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
ver.

Prewarning
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically

This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the
impending danger of a collision or the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too small.

The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.

The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

109

Controls

Safety

Acute warning with braking function
Warning of the imminent danger of a collision
when the vehicle approaches another object at
a relatively high differential speed.

▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.

The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐
vention in a possible risk of collision.

▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.

Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous prewarning.

The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:

Braking intervention

▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.

The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on
the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is risk of a
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
vated.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.

System limits
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:

110

▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitations

▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.
▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment
version, the field of view of the camera in
the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐
scured.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop knob.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.

Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐
cess of false warnings.

Front-end collision warning
with braking function
The concept
The ystem can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Safety

The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently if needed.
The automatic braking intervention is executed
with limited braking force and for a brief period
only.
If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise
Control with Stop & Go, the front-end collision
warning is controlled via the cruise control ra‐
dar sensor.
The front-end collision warning is available
even if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally the collision warning is delayed
avoiding false alarm.

General information
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible danger of collision with vehicles at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of
warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐
uation.

Detection range

Controls

Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐
dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀
Adapting your speed and driving style
The displays and warnings of the system
do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to
adapt his or her driving speed and style to the
traffic conditions.◀
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk
of an accident.◀
Tow-starting and towing
For tow-starting or towing, switch off the
Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐
tions of the individual braking systems might
lead to accidents.◀

At a glance
Button in the vehicle

It responds to objects if they are detected by
the system.

Hints
Personal responsibility
The system does not serve as a substi‐
tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
traffic situation.

Intelligent Safety button

Radar sensor
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the
vehicle.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

111

Controls

Safety

Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐
nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐
ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.
Symbol Measure
A dirty or covered sensor may prevent the de‐
tection of vehicles.
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐
move layers of snow and ice carefully.
▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar
sensor.

Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.

Switch off
Press button: the system is switched
off. The LED goes out.
Re-press button: the system is switched on.
The LED lights up.

Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via iDrive.

The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐
ing.
Brake and increase distance.
The vehicle flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐
ing.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
ver.

Prewarning
This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the
impending danger of a collision or the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.

Acute warning with braking function
Warning of the imminent danger of a collision
when the vehicle approaches another object at
a relatively high differential speed.

2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"

The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by an automatic braking intervention
in a possible risk of collision.

3. Activate the desired time on the Control
Display.

Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous prewarning.

The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐
rently in use.

Braking intervention

1. "Settings"

The detection of objects can be influenced by
technical system limitations, e. g. pedestrians
or stationary objects. Limitations of the detec‐
tion range and functional restrictions are to be
considered.

112

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Safety

The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on
the brake pedal. The system can assist with
automatic braking intervention if there is risk of
a collision. The intervention can bring the vehi‐
cle to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
vated.
Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h the braking
intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure.
No automatic delay occurs.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.

System limits
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Controls

▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.
▷ If the radar sensor is dirty or obscured.

Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐
cess of false warnings.

Pedestrian warning with city
braking function
The concept
The ystem can help prevent accidents with pe‐
destrians.
The system issues a warning in the city driving
speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐
lision with pedestrians and includes a braking
function.
The camera in the area of the rearview mirror
controls the system.

General information
In daylight the system warns of possible colli‐
sions with pedestrians at speeds from about
6 mph/10 km/h to about 35 mph/60 km/h
shortly before a collision the system supports
you with a braking intervention.
Under those circumstances it reacts to people
who are within the detection range of the sys‐
tem.

▷ Pedestrians.
▷ Stationary objects.

Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

113

Controls

Safety

Detection range

Tow-starting and towing
For tow-starting or towing, switch off the
Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐
tions of the individual braking systems might
lead to accidents.◀

At a glance
Button in the vehicle
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas.
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

114

The camera is found near the interior rearview
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Safety

Switch off

Controls

System limits

Press button: the systems are turned
off. The LED goes out.
Press button: the systems are turned on. The
LED lights up.

Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.

Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on
the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is risk of a
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
vated.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.

Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
ited.
Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF.
▷ If the camera viewing field or the front
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop knob.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.

Lane departure warning
The concept
Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
you when the vehicle on streets with lane
markings is about to leave the lane. This

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

115

Controls

Safety

speed, depending on the country version, is
between 35 mph/55 km/h and
45 mph/70 km/h.

Camera

When switching on the system below this
speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in
the event of warnings. The time of the warning
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
uation.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.

The camera is found near the interior rearview
mirror.

Hints

Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the
course of the road and the traffic situation.
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐
ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐
cle.◀

Switching on/off
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.

At a glance

Display in the instrument cluster

Button in the vehicle

▷ Lines: system is activated.
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be
issued.

Issued warning

Lane departure warning

If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.

End of warning
The warning ends:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
116

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Safety

▷ When using the turn signal.

System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.

Controls

The lamp in the exterior mirror housing is dim‐
med.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐
uations described above.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashes
and the steering wheel vibrates.

▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.

At a glance
Button in the vehicle

▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.

Active Blind Spot Detection
The concept

Active Blind Spot Detection

Two radar sensors below the rear bumper
monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle
at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐
cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

117

Controls

Safety

Radar sensors

and the lamp in the exterior mirror housing
flashes brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the
critical zone.

System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
The radar sensors are located under the rear
bumper.

▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.

Switching on/off

▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.

Press button.

A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.

▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.

Display
Lamp in the exterior mirror housing

For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and

Information stage

▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

The dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror hous‐
ing indicates when there are vehicles in the
blind spot or approaching from behind.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.

Warning
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly

118

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Safety

Brake force display
The concept

Controls

After travel has begun, the system is trained
about the driver, so that increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue can be detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐
ior.
▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommen‐
dation to take a break.

▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lights light up in addition.

Attentiveness assistant
The concept
The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐
ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐
notonous journeys, e.g., on highways. In this
situation, it is recommended that the driver
takes a break.

Note

Break recommendation
If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or
fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control
Display with the recommendation to take a
break.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
only once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break, another recommendation to take
a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.

System limits
The function may be limited in the following
situations, for instance, and will either output
an incorrect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.

Personal responsibility
The system cannot act as a substitute for
the personal assessment of one's physical
state and may not detect an increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue or may not detect it cor‐
rectly. Therefore, make sure that the driver is
rested and alert; otherwise, risks may be de‐
tected too late and an accident be caused as a
result.◀

▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.

Function
The system is activated each time the engine
is started and cannot be switched off.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

119

Controls

Driving stability control systems

Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Within
the physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehi‐
cle on a steady course by reducing engine
speed and by applying brakes to the individual
wheels.

Note
Adjust your driving style to the situation
An appropriate driving style is always the
responsibility of the driver.

Antilock Brake System ABS

The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not
even with DSC.

ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.

Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
margin by driving in a risky manner.◀

The vehicle contains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing
active safety.

Do not deactivate DSC when driving with
roof load

ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.

Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability Control
DSC when driving with roof load, e.g. roofmounted luggage rack.

Brake assistant

Otherwise, driving safety is not given in driv‐
ing-critical situation due to the elevated center
of gravity.◀

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the greatest possible
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.

Overview
Button in the vehicle

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.

DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
The concept
DSC prevents traction loss in the power
wheels when driving off and accelerating.

120

DSC OFF button

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving stability control systems

Indicator/warning lights
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
failed.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

Controls

The system ensures maximum headway on
special road conditions or loose road surfaces,
e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐
what limited driving stability.
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
provides maximum traction. Driving stability is
limited during acceleration and when driving in
curves.

When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
in curves.

Therefore drive with appropriate caution.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.

▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.

Deactivating DSC
Press and hold this button but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.
The DSC system is switched off.
The steering and, depending on the equip‐
ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:

▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
driving off from loose grounds.
▷ When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
Activating DTC
Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
OFF lights up.

Activating DSC
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.

Deactivating DTC
Press button again.

Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated.

DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
The concept
The DTC system is a version of the DSC where
forward momentum is optimized.

TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
tor lamp go out.

xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐
tributes the drive forces to the front and rear
axles as demanded by the driving situation and
road surface.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

121

Controls

Driving stability control systems

Dynamic Damping Control

Driving Dynamics Control

The concept

This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.

The Driving Dynamics Control helps to finetune the vehicle's settings and features. Vari‐
ous programs can be selected for this purpose.
The Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC
OFF buttons can each be used to activate a
program.

The system enhances driving dynamics and
comfort fitting road surface and driving style.

Programs
The system offers several different programs.
Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics
Control, refer to page 122.

Overview
Button in the vehicle

SPORT
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility.

SPORT+
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility when driving
with limited driving stabilization.

Operating the programs

COMFORT/ECO PRO
Balanced control of the vehicle.

Press button

Program
DSC OFF

Variable sport steering

TRACTION

The variable sport steering increases the
steering angle of the front wheels at large
steering wheel angles, e.g., in tight curves or
when parking. Steering becomes more direct.

SPORT+

It also varies the force required to turn the
wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed.
This results in a sporty steering response. In
addition, it becomes easier to steer during
parking and maneuvering.

SPORT
COMFORT
ECO PRO

Automatic program change
The system may automatically switch to COM‐
FORT in the following situations:
▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control.
▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐
TION or DSC OFF mode.

122

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving stability control systems

DSC OFF

Controls

Activating SPORT

When DSC OFF, refer to page 121, is active,
driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in curves.

Press button repeatedly until SPORT
is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring SPORT

TRACTION
When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has
maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC
Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 121, is
activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐
celeration and when driving in curves.

When the display is activated on the Control
Display, refer to page 124, the SPORT driving
mode can be set to individual specifications.
▷ Activating SPORT.
▷ "Configure SPORT"
▷ Configuring the SPORT driving mode.

SPORT+
Sporty driving with optimized suspension and
adapted engine control with limited driving sta‐
bilization.

SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐
vated:
1. "Settings"

Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.

2. "Driving mode"

The driver handles several of the stabilization
tasks.

3. "Configure SPORT"

Activating SPORT+
Press button repeatedly until SPORT+
appears in the instrument cluster and
the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up.

Automatic program change
When activating cruise control, the program
automatically switches to SPORT mode.

Indicator/warning lights
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up:
Dynamic Traction Control is activated.

4. Configure driving mode.
This configuration is retrieved when the
SPORT driving mode is activated.

COMFORT
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving
stabilization.

Activating COMFORT
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
In certain situations, the system automatically
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
program change, refer to page 122.

ECO PRO

SPORT
Depending on the equipment, consistently
sporty tuning of the suspension, steering, and
engine control for greater driving agility with
maximum driving stabilization.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications. The configuration is stored for
the profile currently in use.

ECO PRO, refer to page 175, provides consis‐
tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for
maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐
zation.
Comfort functions and the engine controller
are adjusted.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

123

Controls

Driving stability control systems

The program can be configured to individual
specifications.

3. "Driving mode info"

Activating ECO PRO

Drive-off assistant

Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.

Configuring ECO PRO
1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
Make the desired settings.

Configuring driving program
Settings can be made for the following driving
programs in Driving mode:
▷ SPORT, refer to page 123.
▷ ECO PRO, refer to page 176.

Displays
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a
list of the selectable programs.
Depending on your vehicle's op‐
tional features, the list in the in‐
strument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.

Selected program
The instrument cluster displays
the selected program.

Display on the Control Display
Program changes can be displayed on the
Control Display.

This system supports driving off on inclines.
The parking brake is not required.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
For vehicles with respective equipment ver‐
sions, the possible holding duration amounts
to 2 minutes.
Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer
is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
Driving off without delay
After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐
ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant
will not hold the vehicle in place for more than
approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin to
roll back.◀

Servotronic
The concept
The Servotronic varies the steering force re‐
quired to turn the wheels in accordance with
the vehicle speed. At low speeds, the steering
force is strongly supported, i. e. during steer‐
ing, low force is required. As the speed in‐
creases, the assistance of the steering force is
reduced.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐
ing to the driving program, so that a direct,
sporty feel and/or comfortable steering is con‐
veyed.

1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"

124

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving comfort

Controls

Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

As soon as the road is clear, the vehicle accel‐
erates to the desired speed.
The speed is also maintained downhill, but
may not be maintained uphill if engine power is
insufficient.

General information
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.

Hints

Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go function, ACC
The concept
Use this system to select a desired speed that
the vehicle will maintain automatically on clear
roads.
To the extent possible, the system automati‐
cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle
ahead of you.
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the
vehicle ahead of you can be varied.
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.
To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐
tomatically reduces the speed, applies the
brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi‐
cle ahead begins moving faster.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and
then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐
riod, the system is able to detect this within the
given system limits. Your own vehicle will
brake automatically and then accelerate again.
If the vehicle ahead of you drives away again
after a prolonged period, briefly press the ac‐
celerator pedal or press the appropriate button
to reactivate the system. The vehicle will auto‐
matically accelerate.

Personal responsibility
Even an active system holds the driver
responsible for his or her driving, particularly
for staying in your lane, adjusting your speed,
keeping your distance and for your driving
style all in relation to traffic.
Technically the system has its limits, it cannot
independently react to all traffic situations.
Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe
the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and
react when needed, e.g. through braking,
steering or make evasive maneuvers - risk of
accident.◀
Unfavorable weather conditions
In the event of unfavorable weather and
light conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall,
slush, fog or glare, this may result in poorer
recognition of vehicles as well as short-term
interruptions for vehicles that are already de‐
tected. Drive attentively, and react to the cur‐
rent traffic situation. Intervene actively when
necessary, e.g., by braking, steering or making
an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is the
risk of an accident.◀

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

125

Controls

Driving comfort

Before leaving the vehicle, secure it
against moving on its own.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning: set the parking brake and ensure that the
Steptronic transmission is in position P. Other‐
wise, the vehicle may begin to move.◀

Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press but‐
ton

Function

A dirty or covered sensor may prevent the de‐
tection of vehicles.
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐
move layers of snow and ice carefully.

System on/off, interrupt, refer
to page 126
Store, maintain speed, refer to
page 127
Resume speed, refer to
page 128
Reduce distance, refer to
page 128

▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar
sensor.

Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.

Increase distance, refer to
page 128

The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
to the current speed.

rocker switch:

Cruise control can be used.

Maintain, store, change speed,
refer to page 127

Switch off
Deactivated or interrupted system

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's
series, optional features and country specifica‐
tions.

With deactivated or interrupted system
use your brakes, steering and moves as usual
to avoid the chance of an accident.◀

Radar sensor

To switch off the system while standing, step
on brake pedal at the same time.

A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the
vehicle.

Press button.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.

126

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving comfort

Interrupting

Controls

Maintaining/storing the speed

When active, press the button.

Press button.
Or:

If interrupting the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the brakes are applied.
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is
activated or DSC is deactivated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.

Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.

▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are
opened while the vehicle is standing still.

When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.

▷ If the system has not detected objects for
an extended period, e.g., on a road with
very little traffic without curb or shoulder
markings.

This is displayed in the speedometer and
briefly in the instrument cluster. Displays in the
instrument cluster, refer to page 128.

▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐
rupted, e.g., by dirt or heavy fog.

When cruise control is maintained or stored,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned
on if needed.

Maintaining, storing, and changing the
speed

Changing the speed

Hints
Adjusting the desired speed
Modify desired speed to road conditions
and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise,
there is the risk of an accident.◀
Differences in speed
Large differences in speed relative to ve‐
hicles ahead of the vehicle cannot be compen‐
sated by the system for example in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
vehicle.
▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves
into the wrong lane.◀

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

127

Controls

Driving comfort

Distance

To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐
matically, press the accelerator or press
the RES or SET button.

Select a distance
Adjust the distance according to the traf‐
fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is
the risk of an accident. Maintain the prescribed
safety distance.◀

Reduce distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐
tance, refer to page 128.

Increase distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐
tance, refer to page 128.

Calling up the desired speed and
distance
While driving
Press button with the system
switched on.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.

While standing
The system brought the vehicle to a complete
standstill:
▷ Green marking in the speedometer:
Your vehicle accelerates automatically as
soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐
dar sensor moves off.
▷ Speedometer markings turn orange: no au‐
tomatic driving off.

128

Rolling bars in the distance display indicate
that the the vehicle detected by the radar sen‐
sor has driven off.
Your vehicle was brought down to a halt
through stepping on the brake pedal and it is
standing behind another vehicle:
1.

Press button to call up a stored
desired speed.

2. Release the brake pedal.
3. Step on the accelerator briefly, or press the
RES rocker switch when the vehicle ahead
of you drives away.

Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed
▷ The marking lights up green:
the system is active.
▷ The marking lights up or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.

Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐
tem requirements are currently not ready for
operations.

Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Shown is selected distance to the vehicle driv‐
ing ahead of you.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving comfort

Controls

The conditions are not adequate for the sys‐
tem to work.

Distance display
Distance 1

The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.

Distance 2

The vehicle symbol flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds:

Distance 3

You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Distance 4
This value is set after the system is
switched on.
The system has been interrupted or
distance control is temporarily sup‐
pressed because the accelerator
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle
was not detected.
Distance control is temporarily sup‐
pressed because the accelerator
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle
was detected.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven
away.
ACC is no longer accelerating. To accelerate
further, activate ACC by briefly stepping on
the accelerator pedal, pressing the RES but‐
ton or rocker switch.

Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.

System limits
Speed range
The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
The minimum speed that can be set is
20 mph/30 km/h. The maximum speed that
can be set depends on the vehicle.
The system can also be activated when sta‐
tionary.
Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐
uation when using the system.

Detection range
Indicator/warning lights
Personal responsibility
The indicator and warning lights do not
relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt
his or her desired driving speed and style to
the traffic conditions.◀
The vehicle symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
The vehicle symbol flashes orange:

The detection lidacity of the system and the
automatic braking lidacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you
for instance might not be detected.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

129

Controls

Driving comfort

Limited detection potential
Because of the limited possible detec‐
tion, you should be alert at all times so that you
can intervene if needed; otherwise, there is the
risk of an accident.◀

Deceleration
The system does not decelerate when a sta‐
tionary obstacle is located in the same lane,
e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end
of traffic congestion.

tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐
hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,
the system requests that the driver intervene
by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐
vers, if needed. You must react yourself; other‐
wise, there is the risk of an accident.◀

Unexpected lane change

The system also does not respond to:
▷ Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road
users.
▷ Red traffic lights.
▷ Stationary objects.
▷ Cross traffic.
▷ Oncoming traffic.
No warnings
A warning may not be issued when ap‐
proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐
stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise,
there is the risk of an accident.◀

If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves
into another lane from behind a stopped vehi‐
cle, you yourself must react, as the system
does not react to stopped vehicles.

Cornering

Swerving vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
Swerving vehicles
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
130

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
into a curve at an appropriate speed.
In tight curves the system offers only restricted
detection where a vehicle ahead of you might
be detected late or not at all.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving comfort

Controls

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.

Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar
sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be
caused by damage incurred during parking,
e.g.
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐
ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐
ating.
After releasing the gas pedal the system is re‐
activated and controls speed independently.

Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
▷ On steep inclines.
▷ From behind bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.

Radar sensor
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:

A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails.

Cruise control
The concept
The system maintains a preset speed via the
buttons on the steering wheel. The system
brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking
is insufficient.

General information
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.

Hints
Unfavorable conditions
Do not use the system if unfavorable
conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐
stant speed, e.g.:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.

▷ OAYARS3-A
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:

▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
on a loose road surface.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐
cle and cause an accident.◀

▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

131

Controls

Driving comfort

Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel

▷ The clutch pedal is depressed for a few
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
gaged.
▷ The gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
rent speed.

Press button Function
System on/off, interrupt

▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged.

Store speed

▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated.
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.

Resume speed
rocker switch: change, hold,
store speed

Controls

▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.

Maintaining, storing, and changing the
speed
Hints
Adjusting the desired speed

Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control can be used.

Switch off

Modify desired speed to road conditions
and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise,
there is the risk of an accident.◀
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press button.
Or:

Deactivated or interrupted system
With deactivated or interrupted system
use your brakes, steering and moves as usual
to avoid the chance of an accident.◀
Press button.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.

Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.

Interrupting

When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.

When active, press the button.
The system is automatically interrupted if:
▷ The brakes are applied.
132

This is displayed, refer to page 133, in the
speedometer and briefly in the instrument
cluster.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving comfort

When cruise control is maintained or stored,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned
on if needed.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐
hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.

Resuming the desired speed
Press button.

Controls

Desired speed
▷ The marking lights up green:
the system is active.
▷ The marking lights up or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.

Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐
tem requirements are currently not ready for
operations.

Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.

PDC Park Distance Control
The concept
PDC is a support when parking. When you
slowly approach an object in the rear - or also
in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐
ble - then the object is reported through:
▷ Signal tones.

The stored speed is reached and maintained.

Displays in the instrument cluster

▷ Visual display.

General information

Indicator lamp

Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers measure
the distances from objects.

Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
tem is switched on.

An acoustic warning is first given:

The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐
ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

133

Controls

Driving comfort

▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m.

Switching on/off

To ensure full functionality:

Switching on automatically

▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers,
bicycle racks.

With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion P R.

▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.

Hints
Personal responsibility
Even an active system does not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility while
driving.
Technically the system has its limits, it cannot
independently react to all traffic situations.
Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe
the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and
react when needed - risk of accident.◀
Avoid driving fast with PDC
Avoid approaching an object too fast.
Avoid driving off fast while PDC is not yet ac‐
tive.
For technical reasons, the system may other‐
wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀

Overview
With front PDC: button in vehicle

With front PDC: switching on/off
manually
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.

Display
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
sound indicates the position of the object. E. g.
if an object is detected to the left rear of the
vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
With front PDC: if objects are located both in
front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating
continuous signal is sounded.
The signal tone is switched off, when selector
lever position P is engaged on vehicles with
Steptronic transmission.

Volume
PDC Park Distance Control

134

The volume of the PDC signal tone can be ad‐
justed similar to the sound and volume set‐
tings of the radio.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving comfort

Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.

Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display. Objects that
are farther away are already displayed on the
Control Display before a signal sounds.

Controls

▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before
or after a continuous tone sounds.

False warnings
PDC may issue a warning under the following
conditions even though there is no obstacle
within the detection range:

A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.

▷ In heavy rain.

The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red.

▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.

When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the reel can be made to PDC:

▷ When sensors are covered in snow.

"Rear view camera"

System limits
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:

▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
rages.
▷ In automatic car washes.

▷ For small children and animals.

▷ Through heavy pollution.

▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
coats.

▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.

▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.

The malfunction is signaled by a continu‐
ous tone alternating between the front and
rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction
due to other ultrasound sources is no lon‐
ger present, the system is again fully func‐
tional.

Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.

▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
area on the Control Display.

▷ With moving objects.

PDC has failed. Have the system checked.

▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.

To ensure full functionality:

▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.

▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ dimmedDo not put any stickers on sen‐
sors.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

135

Controls

Driving comfort

▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

At a glance
Button in the vehicle

Surround View
The concept
Surround View comprises various camera as‐
sistance systems that help the driver when
parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits
and intersections.
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 136

Rearview camera

▷ Side View, refer to page 138.
▷ Top View, refer to page 139.

Camera

Rearview camera
The concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.

Hints
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
dent could result from road users or objects
that are not lidtured by the camera.◀

The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tail gate. The image quality may be impaired by
dirt.
Clean the camera lens, refer to page 227.

Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion P R.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
system was switched on via the iDrive.

Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
136

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving comfort

Switching on/off manually
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.

Controls

▷ They help you to estimate how much
space is needed when parking and maneu‐
vering on level pavement.
▷ They are dependent on the current steer‐
ing angle and are continuously adjusted to
the steering wheel movements.

The PDC is shown on the Control Display.

Switching the view via iDrive

Turning circle lines

With PDC activated or Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.

Activating assistance functions

▷ Turning circle lines can only be superim‐
posed on the rearview camera image to‐
gether with pathway lines.

More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.

▷ They show the course of the smallest pos‐
sible turning radius on a level road.

▷ Parking aid lines

▷ Only one turning radius line is displayed af‐
ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer‐
tain angle.

▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.

"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"

Obstacle marking

Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.

Pathway lines

Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera.

▷ Pathway lines can be superimposed on the
image of the rearview camera.

Their colored margins match the markings of
the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the dis‐
tance to the object shown.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

137

Controls

Driving comfort

Parking using pathway and turning
radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐
dius lines lead to within the limits of the
parking space.

System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Assistance functions also take into account
data of the PDC.
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to
page 133.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
under certain circumstances are closer than
they appear. Do not estimate the distance from
the objects on the display.

2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line.

Side View
The concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road
users concealed by obstacles to the left and
right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐
tively late from the driver's seat. To improve
visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐
cle record the traffic situation on each side.

Display settings

Hints

Brightness

The images from both cameras are shown si‐
multaneously on the Control Display.

With the rearview camera switched on:
1.

Select the symbol.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.

Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.

Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle on blind driveways and intersections with
your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could
result from road users or objects located out‐
side the picture area of the Side View cam‐
eras.◀

Select the symbol.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.

138

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving comfort

At a glance

Controls

Switch the system back on if needed.

Button in the vehicle

Display
The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
on the Control Display.

Side View
Guidelines at the bottom of the image show
the position of the front of the vehicle.

Cameras

Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
1.

"Brightness"

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.

Contrast
Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐
ture the image.
The two camera lenses are located on the
sides of the bumper.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.

With the Side View switched on:
1.

"Contrast"

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.

Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 227.

System limits

Switching on/off

The cameras lidture a maximum range of
330 ft/100 m.

Switching on/off manually
Press button.

Top View
The concept

Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.

Top View provides assistance in parking and
maneuvering. The area around the doors and
the road area around the vehicle are shown on
the Control Display for this purpose.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

139

Controls

Driving comfort

Cameras

General information
The image is lidtured by two cameras
integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the
rearview camera.
The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and
rear.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the
exterior mirrors are detected early.

The lenses of the Top View camera are located
at the bottom in the mirror housings. The im‐
age quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 227.

Switching on/off
Overview
Button in the vehicle

Switching on automatically
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion P R.
The Top View and PDC images are displayed if
the system is switched on via iDrive.

Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
Top View

Switching on/off manually
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Top View is displayed.

Display
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display.

140

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving comfort

When the distance to an object is small, a red
bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in
the PDC display.

Controls

track line is continuously adjusted for the
steering wheel movement.
"Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.

System limits
Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the trunk lid open.
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
The display appears as soon as Top View is
activated.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, it is possible to reel to top view:
"Rear view camera"

Brightness
With Top View switched on:
1.

▷ In poor light.
A Check Control message is displayed in some
of these situations.

Parking assistant
The concept

Select the symbol.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.

Contrast
With Top View switched on:
1.

Select the symbol.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.

Displaying the turning radius and
pathway lines
▷ The static, red turning radius line shows
the space needed to the side of the vehicle
when the steering wheel is turned all the
way.
▷ The variable, green pathway line assists
you in assessing the amount of space ac‐
tually needed to the side of the vehicle.
The lane line depends on the engaged
gear and the current steering angle. The

This system assists the driver in parking paral‐
lel to the road.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
sible parking line and takes control of steering
during the parking procedure.
When parking, also take note of the visual and
acoustic information and instructions issued
by the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐
view camera and react accordingly.
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 133.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

141

Controls

Driving comfort

Hints
Personal responsibility
Even an active system does not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility while
driving.
Technically the system has its limits, it cannot
independently react to all traffic situations.
Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe
the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and
react when needed - risk of accident.◀
Changes to the parking space
Changes to the parking space after it was
measured are not taken into account by the
system.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐
dent.◀

▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
4 ft/1.2 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

Regarding the parking procedure
▷ Doors and trunk lid closed.
▷ Parking brake released.
▷ When parking in parking spaces on the
driver's side, the corresponding turn signal
must be set where applicable.

Overview

Transporting cargo
Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter
of the vehicle is not taken into account by the
system during the parking procedure.

Button in the vehicle

Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐
dent.◀
Curbs
The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curb if need be.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐
cle may become damaged.◀

Parking assistant

An engine that has been switched off by the
Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐
cally when the parking assistant is activated.

Requirements
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.

142

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving comfort

Ultrasound sensors

Controls

Display on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but
not activated.
The system is activated.

The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking
spaces are located on the side of the vehicle.

System status

To ensure full functionality:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
▷ Do not put stickers over sensors.

Switching on/off
Switching on with the button
Press button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.

Switching on with the reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
To activate:

"Parking Assistant"

Switch off
The system can be deactivated as follows:
▷

Press button.

▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side
of the vehicle illustrated. Parking assistant
is activated and search for parking space
active.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant
is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
lighted.
▷

The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
been taken over by system.

▷ Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.

▷ Switch off the ignition.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

143

Controls

Driving comfort

Parking using the parking assistant
Check the traffic situation as well
Louds noises outside and inside the ve‐
hicle can drown out the parking assistant's and
PDC's signals.
Check the traffic situation around the vehicle
with your own eyes; otherwise, there is a dan‐
ger of an accident.◀
1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐
vate it if needed.
The status of the parking space search is
indicated on the Control Display.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
The best possible parking position will
come after gear change on the stationary
vehicle - wait for the automatic steering
wheel move.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display.
3. Adjust the parking position yourself if
needed.

Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷

"Parking Assistant" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.

▷

Press button.

▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road
surfaces.
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome, such as curbs.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly
arise.
▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays
clearances that are too small.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
▷ If a turn signal has been actuated contrary
to the desired side for parking.
▷ When switching to another function on the
Control Display.
A Check Control message is displayed.

Resume
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued if needed.
Follow the instructions on the Control Display
to do this.

System limits
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐
tance in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.

Functional limitations

Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if
he takes over steering.

The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.

▷ If a gear is selected that does not match
the instruction on the Control Display.

▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.

▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

144

Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving comfort

Controls

▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before
or after a continuous tone sounds.
The parking assistant may identify parking
spaces that are not suitable for parking.

Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

145

Controls

Climate control

Climate control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

Automatic climate control

Seat heating, left 54

Temperature

Vent settings

Seat heating, right 54

Rear window defroster

Cooling function

Air flow

Recirculated-air mode

AUTO program

10 Interior temperature sensor

Hints
Sufficient ventilation

the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐
dow condensation increases.◀

When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐
tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐
nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐
culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in
146

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Climate control

Climate control functions in detail
Manual air distribution
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
sired program or the desired in‐
termediate setting.

▷

Windows.

▷

Upper body region.

▷
▷

Windows, upper body region, and foot‐
well.
Footwell.

Defrosts windows and removes
condensation
Direct the air distribution toward windows, in‐
crease the air flow and temperature, and, if
needed, use the cooling function.

Rear window defroster
Press button.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.

Air flow, manual
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.

Controls

The cooling function, refer to page 147, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.

Temperature
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.

The automatic climate control reaches this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed
by increasing the cooling or heating output,
and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.

Cooling function
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Press button.
The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐
fied and, depending on the temperature set‐
ting, warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.

The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐
duced automatically to save battery power.

The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.

AUTO program

When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 170, devel‐
ops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Press button.
Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature and
outside influences, the air is directed to the
windshield, side windows, upper body, and
into the footwell.

Recirculated-air mode
You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

147

Controls

Climate control

Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked.
Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐
cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐
tain amount of time in order to avoid window
fogging.
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐
lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if
needed.
Sufficient ventilation
When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐
tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐
nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐
culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in
the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐
dow condensation increases.◀

Switching the system on/off
Switch off
Press the left button for the minimum
speed.
Switching on
Press any button except
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Seat heating.

Microfilter
In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
This filter should be replaced during scheduled
maintenance, refer to page 207, of your vehi‐
cle.

Automatic climate control with enhanced features

Seat heating, left 54
148

Temperature, left

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Climate control

Controls

AUTO program

10 Air distribution, right

Display

11 Air flow, AUTO intensity

Maximum cooling

12 Air distribution, left

Temperature, right

13 Rear window defroster

Seat heating, right 54

Cooling function

14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
clear

Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode

15 Defrosts windows and removes condensa‐
tion

Hints
Sufficient ventilation
When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐
tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐
nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐
culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in
the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐
dow condensation increases.◀

Climate control functions in detail

Depending on the selected temperature,
AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐
ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side
windows, upper body, and into the footwell.
The cooling function, refer to page 150, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible.
Intensity of the AUTO program

Temperature
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.

With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
matic intensity control can be changed.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐
sity.

AUTO program

The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.

Maximum cooling
Press button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, optimum air flow and air circulation
mode.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.

Press button.
Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically.

The function is available above an external
temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
engine running.
Adjust air flow with the program active.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

149

Controls

Climate control

Cooling function

Sufficient ventilation

The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Press button.
The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐
fied and, depending on the temperature set‐
ting, warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 170, devel‐
ops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the
outside air and shuts off automatically.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐
cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐
tain amount of time in order to avoid window
fogging.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.

150

When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐
tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐
nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐
culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in
the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐
dow condensation increases.◀

Manual air distribution
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
▷ Footwell.
▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only.
▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell:
driver's side only.
If the windows are fogged over, press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.

Air flow, manual
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.

Rear window defroster
Press button.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Climate control

Defrosts windows and removes
condensation

Controls

Ventilation
Front ventilation

Press button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
For this purpose, point the side vents onto the
side windows as needed.
Adjust air flow with the program active.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the cooling function or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.

▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.

Switching the system on/off

▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 2.

Switch off

▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature in
the upper body region, arrow 3.

Press the left button for the minimum
speed.
Switching on
Press any button except
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Seat heating.

Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
The set interior temperature for the driver
and passenger are not changed.

Adjusting the ventilation
▷ Ventilation for cooling:

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.

Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's
interior is too hot.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.

This filter should be replaced during scheduled
maintenance, refer to page 207, of your vehi‐
cle.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

151

Controls

Climate control

Ventilation in the rear

Preselecting the reel-on time
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.

Activating the reel-on time
On the Control Display:
▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 1.

1. "Settings"

▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐
row 2.

3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"

Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 3.

Parked-car ventilation
The concept

2. "Climate"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the reel-on time is acti‐
vated.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.

The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
cle interior and lowers its temperature, if
needed.
The system can be switched on and off at any
external temperature, either directly or by us‐
ing two preset reel-on times. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate comf. ventilation"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.

152

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Interior equipment

Controls

Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options

Compatibility

If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the instructions of the system
to be controlled, the system is gener‐
ally compatible with the universal garage door
opener.

Universal Integrated Remote
Control

If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ Your service center.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.

Control elements on the interior
rearview mirror

The concept
The universal garage door opener can operate
up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐
tems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The universal garage door opener re‐
places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.
To operate the remote control, the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror must be program‐
med with the desired functions. The hand-held
transmitter for the particular system is required
in order to program the remote control.
During programming
During programming and before activat‐
ing a device using the universal garage door
opener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐
mals or objects in the area of the remote-con‐
trolled device; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐
jury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.◀
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.

▷ LED, arrow 1.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.

Programming
General information
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the left and right button on
the interior rearview mirror simultaneously
for approximately 20 seconds until the LED
on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

153

Controls

Interior equipment

erases all programming of the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to
8 cm away from the buttons of the interior
rearview mirror. The required distance de‐
pends on the manual transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button
of the desired function on the hand-held
transmitter and the button to be program‐
med on the interior rearview mirror. The
LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐
gin flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐
rior rearview mirror has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐
tween the interior rearview mirror and the
hand-held transmitter and repeat the step.
Several more attempts at different distan‐
ces may be necessary. Wait at least
15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the handheld transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button
and repeatedly press and release the
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds.
6. To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐
rior rearview mirror buttons.

Special feature of the alternatingcode wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after
repeated programming, please check if the
system to be controlled features an alternat‐
ing-code system.

rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then
stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system
features an alternating-code system. Flashing
and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐
peat for approximately 20 seconds.
For systems with an alternating-code system,
the universal garage door opener and the sys‐
tem also have to be synchronized.
Please read the operating manual to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
ond person.
To synchronize:
1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
rearview mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You
have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior rearview mirror for approximately
3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,
repeat this step up to three times in order
to finish synchronization. Once synchroni‐
zation is complete, the programmed func‐
tion will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror
button to be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED
starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held
transmitter for the system to be controlled
approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The
required distance depends on the manual
transmitter.

Read the system's operating manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior rear‐
view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior
154

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Interior equipment

4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐
idly. The LED flashing faster indicates that
the button on the interior rearview mirror
has been programmed. The system can
then be controlled by the button on the in‐
terior rearview mirror.

Controls

proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes
rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The
functions cannot be deleted individually.

Digital compass
Overview

If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step. Several more attempts at
different distances may be necessary. Wait
at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the handheld transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button
and repeatedly press and release the
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds.

Controls
Before operation
Before operating a system using the uni‐
versal garage door opener, ensure that there
are no people, animals, or objects within the
range of movement of the remote-controlled
system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or
damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror while the engine is running or when
the ignition is started. To do this, hold down
the button within receiving range of the system
until the function is activated. The interior rear‐
view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐
nal is being transmitted.

Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the left and right button on the
interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐

Control button

Mirror display

Mirror display
The point of the compass is displayed in the
mirror when driving straight.

Operating concept
Various functions can be called up by pressing
the control button with a pointed object, such
as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
The following setting options are displayed in
succession, depending on how long the con‐
trol button is pressed:
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
setting.
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Setting the compass zones
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
fer to World map with compass zones.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

155

Controls

Interior equipment

World map with magnetic zones

Procedure

1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the
set compass zone appears in the mirror.

1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
objects or overhead power lines near the
vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
drive around in a circle.

2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the
number of the compass zone that corre‐
sponds with your location appears in the
mirror.
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐
pass is ready for use again after approximately
10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
event of the following:
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does
not change despite changing the direction
of travel.
▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐
played.

156

2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
on the display. Next, drive in a complete
circle at least once at a speed of no more
than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐
cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of
the compass.

Left/right-hand steering
The digital compass is already set for right or
left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the language
Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control
button again to reel between English "E" and
German "O".

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Interior equipment

Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐
mately 10 seconds.

Sun visor

Controls

Replace the cover after use
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀

Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.

Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
mirror lighting switches on.
The lighter is located next to the ashtray.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter

Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.

Ashtray
Opening

Connecting electrical
devices
Hints
Do not connect charging devices to the
12 volt socket in the vehicle
Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐
tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as
this may damage the vehicle battery due to an
increased power consumption.◀

Raise cover.

Emptying
Take out the insert.

Replace the cover after use

Lighter
Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐
erwise, there is a danger of getting burned.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote
control with you when leaving the vehicle so
that children cannot use the lighter and burn
themselves.◀

Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀

Sockets
General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

157

Controls

Interior equipment

Note

In the trunk

The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.

Front center console

The socket is located on the left side in the
trunk.

USB interface for data
transfer

Raise the lid and remove the cover or cigarette
lighter.

The concept

Rear center console

Connection for importing and exporting data
on USB devices, e.g.:
▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 35.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Importing Trips.

Hints
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
Remove the cover.

▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lights to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB interface for recharg‐
ing external devices.

158

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Interior equipment

Without telephone: overview

Controls

Removing
Cargo cover in rear window
1. Pull the cargo cover with both hands by the
outer edges towards the rear, arrows 1, to
disengage it from the catches.

The USB interface is located in the glove com‐
partment.

With telephone: overview
2. Pull the cargo cover downwards, arrow 2,
and remove it.
Cargo cover in the cargo area

The USB interface is located in the center arm‐
rest.

Cargo area

Push the cargo cover upwards, arrow 1, until it
disengages from the catches and then pull it
towards the front, arrow 2.

Cargo cover
Note
Do not deposit heavy objects
Do not deposit heavy or hard objects on
the cargo cover. Otherwise, they may pose a
risk to occupants, such as during braking and
evasive maneuvers.◀

Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to reinstall. The
cargo covers must snap audibly into place on
their respective holders.

Enlarging the trunk

General information

The cargo cover is in two parts.

The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrest.

This can be removed to load bulky luggage.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

159

Controls

Interior equipment

The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts
at a ratio of 60 to 40.

Folding down the sides

If equipped with through-loading system: the
rear seat backrest is divided in the ratio 40–20–
40. The sides and the middle section can be
folded down separately.

Hints
Danger of jamming
Before folding down the rear seat back‐
rests, ensure that the area of movement of the
backrests is clear. In particular, ensure that no
one is located in or reaches into the area of
movement of the rear seat backrests when the
middle section is folded down. Otherwise, in‐
jury or damage may result.◀

Reach into the recess and pull forward.

Folding down the middle section

Reach into the recess and pull forward.

Ensure that the lock is securely engaged
When you fold back the backrest make
sure that it locks in place. When this happens
the red warning field on the seat disappears.
Otherwise transported cargo could shoot into
the car's interior during braking or evasive ma‐
neuvers and endanger occupants.◀
Using the middle safety belt
If the middle safety belt in the rear is
used, the larger side of the backrest must be
locked. Otherwise, the safety belt will not have
a restraining effect.◀

160

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Storage compartments

Controls

Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 162.
▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
console, refer to page 163.

Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Note

Hints
No loose objects in the car's interior
Do not stow any objects in the car's inte‐
rior without securing them; otherwise, they
may present a danger to occupants e.g., during
braking and evasive maneuvers.◀
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐
board

Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately af‐
ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐
cur during accidents.◀

Opening

Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard.
The mat materials could damage the dash‐
board.◀

Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:

Pull the handle.

▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 161.

The light in the glove compartment switches
on.

▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side,
refer to page 162.

Closing

▷ Without Smoker's package: Front storage
compartment, in front of the cupholders,
refer to page 162.
▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest, refer to page 162.

Fold cover closed.

Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key. This prevents access to the
glove compartment.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

161

Controls

Storage compartments

After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key.

Compartments in the doors
Do not stow any breakable objects
Do not store any breakable objects, e. g.
glass bottles, in the compartments, or there is
an increased risk of injury in the event of an ac‐
cident.◀

Driver's side
Note
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately af‐
ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐
cur during accidents.◀

Center armrest
Front
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.

Opening

Pull the handle.
Fold the center armrest up.

Closing
Fold cover closed.

Repositioning

Front storage compartment

Center armrest can be pushed forwards or
backwards. It engages in the end positions.

Connection for an external audio
device
An external audio device, e.g.,
an MP3 player, can be con‐
nected via the AUX-IN port or
the USB audio interface in the
center armrest.
Raise the lid to open it.

162

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Storage compartments

Storage compartment in the
rear
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest.

Controls

To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after
the other.
Pushing back the covers
Push back the covers before folding up
the center armrest; otherwise, the cupholder
could become damaged.◀

Cupholders
Hints
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is
the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
Unsuitable containers
Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐
tainers into the cupholders. This may result in
damage.◀

Front

Clothes hooks
Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐
er's view.◀
No heavy objects
Do not hang heavy objects from the
hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger
to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐
neuvers.◀

Press on the top edge to fold open.

Rear
In the center armrest.

Storage compartments in the
cargo area
Storage compartment
A storage compartment is located on the left
side for the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to
page 209, and the first aid kit, refer to
page 219.
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

163

Controls

Storage compartments

Net
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
right side.

Storage compartment under the cargo
floor panel
Maximum load
To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
exceed a maximum permitted load of 44 lbs/
20 kg in the storage compartment under the
cargo floor panel.◀

Multi-function hook

A multi-function hook is located on the left
side in the trunk.
The multi-function hooks can be loaded up to
a max. of 8.8 lbs/4 kg.
Lightweight objects only
Only hang lightweight objects, e.g. shop‐
ping bags, from the multifunction hooks. Oth‐
erwise, there is a danger of objects flying about
during braking and evasive maneuvers.

Fold up the cargo floor panel, arrow.

Partitioning the compartment
The compartment can be divided using an at‐
tachable partition.

Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it
has been appropriately secured.◀

Retaining strap
A retaining strap is available on the left side
trim for fastening small objects.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo, refer to page 172, there
are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Floor net
The floor net can also be used to Secure the
load, refer to page 172, and to store small
parts.

164

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Storage compartments

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Controls

165

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving tips

Things to remember when driving

Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐
other (break-in time).
The following instructions will help accomplish
a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐
trol, refer to page 76.

Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.

Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;

they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.

Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐
formance between brake discs and brake
pads. Drive moderately during this break-in pe‐
riod.

Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components above-men‐
tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
Drive with the tailgate closed
Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
wise, in the event of an accident or braking and
evasive maneuvers, passengers and other traf‐
fic may be injured, and the vehicle may be
damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐
ter the vehicle interior.◀
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.

168

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Things to remember when driving

Hot exhaust system
Hot exhaust system
High temperatures are generated in the
exhaust system.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves,
grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot
exhaust system while driving, while in idle po‐
sition mode, or when parked. Such contact
could lead to a fire, resulting in an increased
risk of serious personal injury as well as prop‐
erty damage.
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise,
there is a danger of getting burned.◀

Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐
hicle
It is not recommended to use mobile phones,
such as mobile phones, in the vehicle interior
without a direct connection to an external aer‐
ial. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronics and
mobile communication devices can interfere
with each other. In addition, there is no assur‐
ance that the radiation generated during trans‐
mission will be conducted away from the vehi‐
cle interior.◀

Driving tips

Driving through water
Observe water level and speed
Do not exceed the maximum water level
and maximum speed; otherwise, the vehicle's
engine, the electrical systems and the trans‐
mission may be damaged.◀
Drive though calm water only and only if it is
not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this
height, no faster than walking speed, up to
3 mph/5 km/h.

Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
ard feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations needed.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
fort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
In certain braking situations, the perforated
brake discs can cause functional problems.
However, this has no effect on the perform‐
ance and operational reliability of the brake.

Objects within the range of movement
of the pedals
No objects in the area around the pedals

Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀

Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the
function of the pedals could be impeded while
driving and create the risk of an accident.

On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.

Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.

This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.

Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly attached to
floor.

Hydroplaning

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐
tened again after they were removed for clean‐
ing, e.g.◀

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

169

Driving tips

Things to remember when driving

Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,
press brake pedal ever so gently every few
miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other traffic.
The heat generated in this process helps dry
the brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.

Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
sponse - generally that cannot be corrected.

Condensation under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops collecting under‐
neath the vehicle.
These traces of water under the vehicle are
normal.

Hills
Avoid stressing the brakes
Avoid placing excessive stress on the
brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐
sure can lead to high temperatures, brakes
wearing out and possibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking.
In addition, steering and brake assist are un‐
available with the engine stopped.◀
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐
wise the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if needed.

Brake disc corrosion
Brake disc corrosion and contamination of the
brake pads are favored by:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion will built up when the maximum
pressure applied to the brake pads during
braking is not reached - thus discs don't get
cleaned.

170

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving tips

Loading
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

Hints
Overloading the vehicle
To avoid exceeding the approved ca‐
pacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle.
Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐
creases the rate at which damage develops in‐
side the tires. This could result in a sudden
loss of tire inflation pressure.◀
No fluids in the cargo area
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the
cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐
aged.◀
Heavy and hard objects
Do not stow any heavy and hard objects
in the car's interior without securing them; oth‐
erwise, they may present a danger to occu‐
pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers.◀

vehicle and unstable driving situations
may result.

2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or
YYY pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.

Determining the load limit
1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

171

Driving tips

Load

Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the trunk

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.

To secure the cargo there are four lashing
eyes in the cargo area.

Floor net

Stowing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.

The floor net can also be used to secure cargo
and store small parts.

▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.

Hook the floor net into the fittings in the trunk
floor.

Securing cargo
Securing cargo
Stow and secure the cargo as described;
otherwise it may present a danger to the occu‐
pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers.◀
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with
cargo straps.
Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or
draw straps to the lashing eyes in the trunk.
172

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving tips

Roof-mounted luggage rack

▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.

Note

▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.

Roof racks are available as special accessories.

Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.

Roof drip rail with flaps

The anchorage points are located in the roof
drip rail above the doors.
Fold the cover outward.

Loading
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center
of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐
fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐
sponse.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie
with ratchet straps.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

173

Driving tips

Saving fuel

Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐
erate driving style and regular maintenance,
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐
ronmental impact.

Close the windows and glass
sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
thereby reduces the range.

Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐
sumption.

Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.

Remove unnecessary cargo

Drive away immediately

Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.

Remove attached parts
following use
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage
racks which are no longer required following
use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

This is the quickest way of warming the cold
engine up to operating temperature.

Look well ahead when
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.

174

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Saving fuel

Avoid high engine speeds
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Start‐
ing with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When
accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐
gine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with the
engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐
stant speed.
If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator of
the vehicle, refer to page 85.

Driving tips

road conditions, maintenance or environmental
factors.

Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
reduce the range, especially in city and stopand-go traffic.
Reel off these functions if they are not needed.
The ECO PRO driving program supports the
energy conserving use of comfort features.
These functions are automatically deactivated
partially or completely.

Use coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.

Have maintenance carried
out

For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll.

Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and operating life.
The maintenance should be carried out by
your service center.

The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.

Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle
automatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐
onds of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style,

Also note the BMW Maintenance System, refer
to page 207.

ECO PRO
The concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
gine control and comfort features, e. g. the cli‐
mate control output, are adjusted.
Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐
matically decoupled from the transmission in
the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐
tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐
duce fuel consumption. Selector lever position
D remains engaged.
In addition, context-sensitive instructions are
displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐
sumption driving style.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

175

Driving tips

Saving fuel

The achieved extended range is displayed in
the instrument cluster as bonus range.

Overview
The system includes the following
EfficientDynamics functions and displays:
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 176.
▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to
page 177
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to
page 176.
▷ ECO PRO coasting driving status, refer to
page 178.
▷ ECO PRO driving style analysis, refer to
page 179.

Activate ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.

Configuring ECO PRO
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
3. Configure the program.

▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":
The output is reduced once the set ECO
PRO speed is reached.

Coasting
Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐
ing the engine and Coasting, refer to
page 178, with the engine idling.
This function is only available in ECO PRO
mode.

ECO PRO climate control
"ECO PRO climate control"
Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or
cooling of the car's interior, fuel consumption
can be economized.
The mirror heating is made available when out‐
side temperatures are very cold.

ECO PRO potential
Shows potential savings with the current set‐
tings in percentages.

Display in the instrument cluster
ECO PRO bonus range
An adjusted driving style helps
you extend your driving range.

Via the iDrive
1. "Settings"

This may be displayed as the
bonus range in the instrument
cluster.

2. "ECO PRO mode"
Or

The bonus range is shown in the range display.

1. "Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure ECO PRO"

The bonus range is automatically reset every
time the vehicle is refueled.

Configure the program.

ECO PRO Tip
▷ "Tip at:":
Adjust the ECO PRO speed.

176

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Saving fuel

Driving tips

Efficiency display

ECO PRO tip, driving tip

Display in the instrument cluster

The arrow indicates that the driving
style can be adjusted to be more fuel
efficient by backing off the accelerator
for instance.

Note
The efficiency display and ECO PRO tips in the
instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO
display is activated.
Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:
Display in the instrument cluster with extended
range

1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "ECO PRO Info"

ECO PRO tip, symbols
An additional symbol and text instructions are
displayed.
Symbol Measure

A mark in the efficiency display informs about
the current driving style.
Mark in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐
ergy recovered by coasting or when braking.
Mark in the area of arrow 2: display when ac‐
celerating.
Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the
bar's color:
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long
as the mark moves within the blue range.
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by
backing off the accelerator pedal.

For efficient driving back off the ac‐
celerator or delay accelerating to al‐
low time to assess road conditions.
Reduce speed to the selected ECO
PRO speed.
Steptronic transmission: shift from
M/S to D.
Steptronic transmission/manual
transmission: follow shifting instruc‐
tions.
Manual transmission: engage neu‐
tral for engine stop.

The display switches to blue as soon as all
conditions for fuel-efficiency-optimized driving
are met.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

177

Driving tips

Saving fuel

Indications on the Control Display

Coasting

EfficientDynamics

The concept

Information on fuel consumption and technol‐
ogy can be displayed while driving.

The system helps to conserve fuel.

1. "Vehicle info"
2. "EfficientDynamics"

Displaying fuel consumption history
The average fuel consumption can be dis‐
played within an adjustable time frame.
Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐
lected time frame.
Trip interruptions are represented below the
bar on the time axis.
"Consumption history"

Adjusting fuel consumption history
time frame
Select the symbol.

Resetting fuel consumption history
1. Open "Options".
2. "Reset consumption history"

Displaying EfficientDynamics info
The current efficiency can be displayed.
"EfficientDynamics info"
The following systems are displayed:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Climate control output.
▷ Coasting.

Display ECO PRO tips
"ECO PRO Tips"
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.

To do this, under certain conditions the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
sion when selector lever position D is set. The
vehicle continues traveling with the engine
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector
lever position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coast‐
ing.
As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐
tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled
again.

Hints
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐
fer to page 175, driving mode.
Coasting is automatically activated when ECO
PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Control.
The function is available in a certain speed
range.
A proactively driving style helps the driver to
use the function as often as possible and sup‐
ports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.
Safety mode
The function is not available under one of the
following conditions.
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low
or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐
sive current.
▷ Cruise control activated.

Functional requirements
In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in
a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐

178

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Saving fuel

prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if
the following conditions are met:

Driving tips

Indications on the Control Display

▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not
operated.

The Coasting driving condition is displayed in
EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode
is active.

▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.

The distance traveled in the Coasting driving
condition is indicated by a counter.

▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
The driving status Coast can be influenced
with the shift paddles.

Display
Display in the instrument cluster
Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2:
driving condition Coasting.
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "EfficientDynamics"
3.
The mark in the efficiency display is backlit in
blue and is located at the zero point. The tach‐
ometer approximately indicates idle speed.

"EfficientDynamics info"

Deactivating the system manually

The coasting point indicator is illuminated at
the zero point during coasting.

The function can be deactivated in the Config‐
ure ECO PRO, refer to page 176, menu, e.g., to
use the braking effect of the engine when trav‐
eling downhill.

Display in the instrument cluster with
extended range

Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.

The mark in the efficiency dis‐
play below the tachometer is
backlit in blue and is located at
the zero point. The tachometer
approximately indicates idle
speed.
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at
the zero point during coasting.

ECO PRO driving style analysis
The concept
In this situation the system helps develop an
especially efficient driving style and to con‐
serve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
Using this indication, the individual driving
style can be oriented toward conserving fuel.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

179

Driving tips

Saving fuel

The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by
an efficient driving style.

Tips about the energy saving driving style,
Conserving fuel, refer to page 174.

This gain in range is displayed as a bonus
range in the instrument cluster and on the
Control Display.

Functional requirement
The function is only available in ECO PRO
mode.

Calling up ECO PRO driving style
analysis
1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "EfficientDynamics"
Select the symbol.

Display on the Control Display

The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐
ysis consists of a symbolized route and a
lookup table.
The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐
ing style. The more efficient the driving style,
the smoother the depicted route becomes, ar‐
row 1.
The table of values contains stars. The more
efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
cluded in the table and the faster the bonus
range increases, arrow 2.
If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
cient, a wavy road and a reduced number of
stars is displayed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during driving.
180

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Saving fuel

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Driving tips

181

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Mobility

Refueling

Refueling
Vehicle features and options

2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise.

Hints
Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 186, prior to refueling.
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range of
30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail
and damage might occur.◀

Fuel lid

Closing

Opening

1. Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.

1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.

2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
to the lid; otherwise, the lid cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
In the event of an electrical malfunction, e.g.
The release is located in the trunk.

184

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Refueling

Mobility

Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol.
This releases the fuel filler flap.

Observe the following when
refueling
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise
fuel may eslide, causing harm to the environ‐
ment and damaging the vehicle.◀
Handling fuels
Observe safety regulations posted at the
gas station.◀

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

185

Mobility

Fuel

Fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

Fuel recommendation
Note

US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Do not use a fuel with a higher percent‐
age of ethanol
Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol per‐
centage than recommended or one with other
types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100; otherwise
this could damage the engine and fuel supply
system.◀

Recommended fuel grade

General fuel quality
Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐
tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐
gine problems, for instance poor engine startup behavior, poor handling and/or poor
performance. Switch gas stations or use a
brand name fuel with a higher octane rating.◀

Gasoline
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐
tent.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐
out metallic additives.
Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐
line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or
iron, as this can cause permanent damage to
the catalytic converter and other compo‐
nents.◀
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.

186

Ethanol should satisfy the following quality
standards:

BMW recommends AKI 91.

Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
Minimum fuel grade
Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐
mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐
formance.◀
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Fuel quality
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Fuel

Mobility

gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

187

Mobility

Wheels and tires

Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

Tire inflation pressure
Safety information

Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours.
The displays of inflation devices may underread by up to 1.45 psi/0.1 bar.
For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire
Monitor.
For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the
tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure
Monitor.

Tire inflation pressure specifications

▷ Driving comfort.

The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 189, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. Tire inflation pressure
specifications apply to approved tire sizes and
recommended tire brands. This information
can be obtained from your service center.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:

The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐
sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a
month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐
serve this precaution, you may be driving on
tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition
that may not only compromise your vehicle's
driving stability, but also lead to tire damage
and the risk of an accident.◀

▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.

Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 189, and adjust as necessary.

Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases along with the tire's
temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐
fications relate to cold tires or tires with the
ambient temperature.

188

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Wheels and tires

Mobility

Tire size

Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI

Front: 225/45 R 18
91 Y RSC

2.2 / 32

2.4 / 35

2.2 / 32

2.6 / 38

2.5 / 36

3.0 / 44

Rear: 255/40 R 18
95 Y RSC

These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
door pillar.
Maximum permissible speed
Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀

Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h

Front: 225/40 R 19
89 Y RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 19
92 Y RSC
Front: 225/35 R 20
90 Y XL RSC
Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 17 102
M

Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60

428i, 428i xDrive
Tire size

Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI

Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/50 R 17 94 H
M+S RSC

2.2 / 32

Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI

2.4 / 35

2.2 / 32

2.6 / 38

225/50 R 17 94 H
M+S RSC

2.2 / 32

2.4 / 35

225/45 R 18 91 V
M+S A/S RSC

2.2 / 32

2.6 / 38

2.4 / 35

2.9 /42

225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC

225/45 R 18 95 V
M+S XL RSC

225/45 R 18 95 V
M+S XL RSC
225/40 R 19 93 V
M+S XL A/S RSC

Tire size
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires

225/50 R 17 94 V
M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V
M+S A/S RSC

435i, 435i xDrive

2.4 / 35

2.9 /42

225/40 R 19 93 V
M+S XL A/S RSC

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

189

Mobility

Wheels and tires

Tire size

Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI

Tire size

Front: 225/45 R 18
91 Y RSC

2.2 / 32

2.4 / 35

Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires

2.3 / 33

2.6 / 38

Rear: 255/40 R 18
95 Y RSC
Front: 225/40 R 19
89 Y RSC

2.5 / 36

3.0 / 44

T 135/80 R 17 102
M

3.0 / 44

225/45 R 18 91 V M 2.8 / 41
+S A/S RSC

3.3 / 48

225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC

Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC
Emergency wheel:

2.5 / 36

225/50 R 17 94 V M
+S A/S RSC

Rear: 255/35 R 19
92 Y RSC
Front: 225/35 R 20
90 Y XL RSC

225/50 R 17 94 H
M+S RSC

Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI

Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60

Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀

Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
428i, 428i xDrive
Without high-speed tuning feature

225/45 R 18 95 V M
+S XL RSC
225/40 R 19 93 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18
91 Y RSC

2.8 / 41

2.5 / 36

2.9 /42

2.8 / 41

Rear: 255/40 R 18
95 Y RSC
Front: 225/40 R 19
89 Y RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 19
92 Y RSC
Front: 225/35 R 20
90 Y XL RSC

3.3 / 48

Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 17 102
M

Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature

190

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Wheels and tires

Tire size

Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI

Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires

Tire size

Mobility

Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI

Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires

225/50 R 17 94 H
M+S RSC

2.5 / 36

3.0 / 44

225/50 R 17 94 H
M+S RSC

2.7 / 39

3.2 / 46

225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC

2.8 / 41

3.3 / 48

225/45 R 18 91 V
M+S A/S RSC

2.8 / 41

3.3 / 48

2.8 / 41

2.9 /42

2.8 / 41

2.9 /42

2.8 / 41

3.3 / 48

225/45 R 18 95 V
M+S XL RSC

225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC

Front: 225/45 R 18 2.8 / 41
91 Y RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18
95 Y RSC

Front: 225/40 R 19 2.5 / 36
89 Y RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 19
92 Y RSC

Front: 225/35 R 20 2.8 / 41
90 Y XL RSC

2.8 / 41

2.9 /42

3.3 / 48

225/45 R 18 95 V
M+S XL RSC
225/40 R 19 93 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18
91 Y RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18
95 Y RSC
Front: 225/40 R 19
89 Y RSC

Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC

Rear: 255/35 R 19
92 Y RSC

Emergency wheel:

Front: 225/35 R 20
90 Y XL RSC

Speed up to a max. of
T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h
M
4.2 / 60

Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC

435i, 435i xDrive

Emergency wheel:

Without high-speed tuning feature

T 135/80 R 17 102
M

Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

191

Mobility

Tire size

Wheels and tires

Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI

Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires

Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h
R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h

225/50 R 17 94 H
M+S RSC

2.7 / 39

3.2 / 46

225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC

2.8 / 41

3.3 / 48

T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h

225/45 R 18 95 V
M+S XL RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 2.8 / 41
91 Y RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18
95 Y RSC

Front: 225/40 R 19 2.8 / 41
89 Y RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 19
92 Y RSC

Front: 225/35 R 20 2.8 / 41
90 Y XL RSC
Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC

2.9 /42

Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0115
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design

2.9 /42

0115: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age
3.3 / 48

Emergency wheel:

Speed up to a max. of
T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h
M
4.2 / 60

DOT … 0115: the tire was manufactured in the
1st week of 2015.

Recommendation
Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at
least every 6 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Tire identification marks

Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.

Tire size

For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Temperature A

245/45 R 18 96 Y

DOT Quality Grades

245: nominal width in mm

Treadwear

45: aspect ratio in %

Traction AA A B C

R: radial tire code

Temperature A B C

18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires

192

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Wheels and tires

Mobility

All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.

the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
quired by law.

Treadwear

The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g,
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart signifi‐
cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐
ing habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.

Temperature grade for this tire

If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀

RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 196, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the sidewall.

M+S

Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.

Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm.
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.

Winter tires

Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
A represent higher levels of performance on

Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 in/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
less suitable for winter operation.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

193

Mobility

Wheels and tires

Minimum tread depth

In case of tire damage
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
duce your speed immediately and have the
rims and tires checked right away; otherwise,
there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the nearest service center. If
necessary, have the vehicle towed or trans‐
ported there. Otherwise, tire damage can be‐
come life threatening for vehicle occupants
and also other traffic.◀

Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Tire damage

Repair of tire damage
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
sult.◀

Changing wheels and tires

General information
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

Mounting

Hints

Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center.

Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
fects:
▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over
curbs, road damage, or similar things.

194

Information on mounting tires

If work is not carried out properly, there is a
danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀

Wheel and tire combination
You can ask the service center about the right
wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions
for the vehicle.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
the function of a variety of systems such as
ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Wheels and tires

Approved wheels and tires

Mobility

Retreaded tires

You should only use wheels and tires
that have been approved by the vehicle manu‐
facturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, e.g.,
despite having the same official size ratings,
variations can lead to chassis contact and with
it, the risk of severe accidents

Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
sign and age of the tire casing structures can
limit service life and have a negative impact on
road safety.◀

The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐
uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐
mine if they are suited for use, and therefore
cannot guarantee the operating safety of the
vehicle.◀

Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.

Recommended tire brands

Winter tires

Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then a respective symbol is displayed in your
field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the
tire specialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
standards for safety and handling.

New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.

Do not exceed the maximum speed for
the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire dam‐
age and accidents can occur.◀

Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
case of a flat tire. Your service center will be
glad to advise you.

Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the front
and rear axles depending on individual driving
conditions. The tires can be rotated between
the axles to achieve even wear. Your service
center will be glad to advise you. After rotating,
check the tire pressure and correct if needed.
Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi‐
cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the
front and rear axles.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

195

Mobility

Wheels and tires

Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Run-flat tires

into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
The compressor can be used to check the tire
inflation pressure.

Hints
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 in/4 mm or more.

Label

▷ Contact the nearest service center if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
wheel.

RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐
porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐
cial rims.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the
event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
Follow the instructions for continued driving
with a flat tire.

Changing run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
Your service center will be glad to advise you.

▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
electronics checked at the next opportu‐
nity and have them replaced if needed.
Enclosed areas
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may
lead to loss of consciousness and death. The
exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an
odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀

Storage
The Mobility System is located under the
cargo floor panel.

Mobility System
The concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed quickly to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
196

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Wheels and tires

Mobility

Filling the tire with sealant

Sealing container

1. Shake the sealing container.

▷ Sealing container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.

2. Take the connection hose completely out
of the compressor housing. Do not kink the
hose.

Compressor

3. Attach the connection hose to the connec‐
tor of the sealing container, ensuring that it
engages audibly.

On/off reel

Holder for bottle

Reduce inflation pressure

Inflation pressure dial

Compressor

Connector/cable for socket

Connection hose — stowed in the bottom
of the compressor

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

197

Mobility

Wheels and tires

4. Slide the sealing container upright into the
holder on the compressor housing, ensur‐
ing that it engages audibly.

5. Screw the connection hose onto the tire
valve of the defective wheel.

7. With the ignition turned on or the engine
running, reel on the compressor.

Switch off the compressor after 10 mi‐
nutes
Do not allow the compressor to run longer than
10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat
and may be damaged.◀
Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐
nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not reel off the compressor at
this point.

6. With the compressor switched off, insert
the plug into a power socket inside the ve‐
hicle.

If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
reached:
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.
3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your service center.

Stowing the Mobility System
1. Remove the connection hose of the seal‐
ant container from the wheel.
2. Remove the connection hose from the
sealant container.

198

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Wheels and tires

3. Wrap the empty sealant container and con‐
nection hose in suitable material to avoid
dirtying the cargo area.

Mobility

4. Insert the connector into a power socket
inside the vehicle.

4. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐
cle.

Distributing the sealant
Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐
sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.

5. Correct the tire inflation pressure to
2.5 bar.

1. Stop at a suitable location.

▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition
turned on or the engine running, reel
on the compressor.

2. Screw the connection hose onto the tire
valve stem.

▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐
ton on the compressor.

To correct the tire inflation pressure

Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Replace the defective tire and the sealant con‐
tainer of the Mobility System as soon as possi‐
ble.
3. Attach the connection hose directly to the
compressor.

Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains
have been tested by the manufacturer of the
vehicle, classified as road-safe and approved.
Information about the approved snow chains
are available from the service center.

Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 225/50 R 17

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

199

Mobility

Wheels and tires

▷ 225/45 R 18
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always
sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐
ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if needed.

Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.

200

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Engine compartment

Mobility

Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

Important features in the engine compartment

Jump-starting, negative battery terminal

Oil filler neck

Vehicle identification number

Coolant reservoir

Washer fluid reservoir

Jump-starting, positive battery terminal

Engine compartment fuse box

The coolant reservoir for 6-cylinder and
diesel engines is located on the opposite
side of the engine compartment.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

201

Mobility

Engine compartment

Hood

Indicator/warning lights

Hints

When the hood is unlocked, a Check Control
message is displayed.

Working in the engine compartment
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
If work is not carried out properly, there is a
danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀

Closing the hood
Hood open when driving
If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over im‐
mediately and close it securely.◀
Danger of jamming
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Never reach into the engine compart‐
ment
Never reach into spaces or gaps in the engine
compartment; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐
jury, e.g., from rotating or hot parts.◀
Fold down wiper arm
Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield, or this
may result in damage.◀

Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16
in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.

Opening the hood
1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked

2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.

202

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Engine oil

Mobility

Engine oil
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a check control message is displayed.

Requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip
is displayed.
With frequent short-distance trips, regularly
perform a detailed measurement.

Displaying the engine oil level

General information

On the Control Display:

The engine oil consumption is dependent on
the driving style and driving conditions.

1. "Vehicle info"

The engine oil consumption can increase in
case of, for example:

▷ Sporty driving.

Engine oil level display messages

▷ Break-in the engine.

Different messages appear on the display de‐
pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention
to these messages.

▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ Usage of non-approved engine oil grades.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil
measurement.
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles:
▷ Status display
▷ Detailed measurement

2. "Vehicle status"
"Engine oil level"

If the engine oil level is too low, within the next
125 miles/200 km Add engine oil, refer to
page 204.
Engine oil level too low
Add engine oil immediately; otherwise,
an insufficient amount of engine oil could re‐
sult in engine damage.◀
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Too much engine oil

Electronic oil measurement
Status display

Have the vehicle checked immediately;
otherwise, surplus engine oil can lead to en‐
gine damage.◀

The concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐
play.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

203

Mobility

Engine oil

Detailed measurement

Adding engine oil

The concept

General information

In the detailed measurement the engine oil
level is checked and displayed via a scale.

Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐
cle before engine oil is added.

Gasoline engine:
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a check control message is displayed.

Oil filler neck

Diesel engine:
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.

General information
A detailed measurement is only possible with
certain engines.

Requirements
▷ Vehicle is on level road.
▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral
position, clutch and accelerator pedals not
depressed.
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in
selector lever position N or P and accelera‐
tor pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐
perature.

Performing a detailed measurement
In order to perform a detailed measurement of
the engine oil level:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.

Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Adding engine oil
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;
otherwise, this may cause engine damage.◀
Do not add too much engine oil
When too much engine oil is added, im‐
mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise,
this may cause engine damage.◀
Protect children
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
dren and observe the warnings on the contain‐
ers to prevent health risks.◀

"Measure engine oil level"

4. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
via a scale.
Time: approx. 1 minute.

Engine oil types to add
Hints
No oil additives
Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐
age.◀

204

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Engine oil

Mobility

Viscosity grades for engine oils
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity
grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40,
and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine
damage may occur.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.

Suitable engine oil types
You can add engine oils that meet the follow‐
ing oil rating standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
Further information regarding the oil specifica‐
tions and viscosities of engine oils can be in‐
quired with the service center.

Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Gasoline engine
API SM or superior oil rating.

Engine oil change:
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you let the service center change the motor oil.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

205

Mobility

Coolant

Coolant
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

The marks are on the side of the coolant
reservoir.
Symbol

Meaning
Maximum
Minimum

Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.

Hints
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while
the engine is hot; otherwise, esliding coolant
may cause burns.◀
Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
engine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about the
suitable additives are available from the service
center.

3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click.
The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
the lid must point towards one another.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.

Coolant level

Disposal

General information
Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐
ant reservoir is located on the right side or the
left side of the engine compartment.

Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.

Checking
1. Let the engine cool.
2. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks.
206

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Maintenance

Mobility

Maintenance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

BMW maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases scopes and intervals may vary
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Additional information is available from
the service center.

Condition Based Service
CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐
nizes the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
Detailed information on service requirements,
refer to page 84, can be displayed on the Con‐
trol Display.

Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control.
Your service center will read out this data and
suggest the right array of service procedures
for your vehicle.
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐
mote control with which the vehicle was driven
most recently.

Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a service center update the
time-dependent maintenance procedures,
such as checking brake fluid and, if needed,
changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter.

Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els for additional information on service re‐
quirements.
Maintenance and repair should be performed
by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐
ular maintenance procedures recorded in the
vehicle's Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐
nance.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

207

Mobility

Maintenance

Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Note
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis
The socket for onboard diagnostics may
only be used by the service center or a work‐
shop that operates in accordance with the
specifications of the vehicle manufacturer with
correspondingly trained personnel and other
authorized persons. Otherwise, use may result
in operating problems for the vehicle.◀

Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.

Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
208

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Replacing components

Mobility

Replacing components
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

Onboard vehicle tool kit

3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and
fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.

4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the
catch.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
Folding down wipers before opening the
hood
Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper arms with the wiper blades are against
the windshield to prevent damage.◀

The onboard vehicle tool kit is located behind
the left folding cover in the trunk.

Wiper blade replacement

Lamp and bulb replacement
Hints
Lights and bulbs

Note
Do not fold down the wipers without
wiper blades

Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety.

Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades
have not been installed; this may damage the
windshield.◀

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
the service center if you are unfamiliar those or
if they have not been described here.

Replacing the wiper blades

You can obtain a selection of replacement
bulbs at the service center.

1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer
to page 72, the wiper arms.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

209

Mobility

Replacing components

Headlight glass

Danger of burns
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
otherwise, there is a danger of getting
burned.◀
Working on the lighting system
When working on the lighting system,
you should always reel off the lights affected to
prevent short circuits.
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
on xenon headlights
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center. Due to the high voltage
present in the system, there is a danger of fatal
injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀
Do not touch the bulbs
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar,
or hold the bulb by its base.◀

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several hours;
otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀

210

Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the light switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
light glass does not need to be changed.
If the headlights do not dim despite driving
with the light switched on, increasing humidity
forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the
service center check this.

Headlight setting
The headlight adjustments can be affected by
changing lights and bulbs. Have the head‐
lights' settings checked and corrected by serv‐
ice after a replacement.

Front lights, bulb replacement
Xenon headlights
Xenon headlights
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the
likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the
lights on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a bulb fails, reel on the front fog lights and
continue the trip with great care. Comply with
local regulations.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
on xenon headlights
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center. Due to the high voltage
present in the system, there is a danger of fatal
injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
please contact your BMW center.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Replacing components

Mobility

21-watt bulb, PY21W

Headlights

1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐
ets and remove the cover.

Parking lights / daytime running lights

Low beams/high beams/headlight flasher

Turn signal

Low beams and high beams are designed with
xenon technology.

2. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the
wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb
socket counterclockwise and remove.

The parking lights and daylight running lights
are made using LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Turn signal
Follow general instructions, refer to page 209.
3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐
verse order of removal.
5. Attach the cover to the wheel house.

LED headlights
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
With LED headlights, all front lights and side
indicators are designed with LED technology.
If an LED fails, switch on the front fog lights
and continue the trip with great care. Comply
with local regulations.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

211

Mobility

Replacing components

Remove the bulb.

Headlights

Cornering light

Low beams/headlight flasher

High beams/headlight flasher

Parking lights / daytime running lights

Turn signal

Side marker lights

Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.

Front fog lights
Follow general instructions, refer to page 209.

3. Insert the new bulb, connect the connector
and screw on the wheel house panel.

Turn signal in exterior mirror
Follow general instructions, refer to page 209.
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
LED technology. Contact your service center
in the event of a malfunction.

Tail lights, bulb replacement
At a glance

35-watt bulb, H8.
1. Use the handle of the screwdriver from the
onboard vehicle tool kit to remove the
three wheel house panel screws, arrow 1.
Carefully pull back the wheel house panel,
arrow 2.

2. Pull off the bulb connector, arrow 1.
Turn the bulb, arrow 2.
Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise.
Right side of vehicle: turn counterclock‐
wise.
212

Turn signal

Reversing lamp

Inside brake lamp

Tail lights

Outside brake lamp

Bulb replacement, exterior tail lights
General information
Follow general instructions, refer to page 209.
Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Replacing components

Outer brake lamp: 21-watt bulb, H21WLL.
The tail lights feature LED technology. Contact
your service center in the event of a malfunc‐
tion.

Mobility

that the foam rubber sealing ring is on the
centering pin.

Use caution when replacing the bulb
Use caution and proceed one step at a
time when replacing the bulbs to prevent dam‐
age to the tail lights or the vehicle.◀
Removing the exterior tail lamp
1. Open tailgate.
2. Use the screwdriver to unscrew the three
fixings, arrows, and take off the cover from
the top.

5. Release the catch at the top on the con‐
nector of the connecting line and remove
the connector from the bulb holder.
Replacing the bulbs
1. Loosen the three fasteners, arrows 1, on
the bulb holder and remove the bulb holder
from the tail lamp, arrow 2.

3. Loosen the two nuts with the screwdriver
handle, arrows.

2. Press the defective bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make
sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐
teners.
4. Grasp the inner edge of the tail lamp, ar‐
row 1, and carefully pull it backward and
out, arrow 2. Use your free hand to hold it
in place in order to prevent the tail lamp
from coming loose suddenly. Make sure

Installing the tail lamp
1. Connect the connecting line to the tail
lamp and secure the bulb holder in the clip.
2. Make sure that the foam rubber sealing
ring is on the centering pin, arrow 2, and is
not damaged.
3. Position and firmly press the outer part of
the tail lamp onto the rubber mount, ar‐

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

213

Mobility

Replacing components

row 1 and the inner part onto the centering
component, arrow 2. Make sure that the
tail lamp engages in the rubber mount.

4. Screw the tail lamp on with the two nuts.
5. Insert and secure the cover. Make sure that
the tubular seal is not pinched.

Replacing the reversing lamp and inner
brake lamp
1. Loosen the bottom holder, arrow 1.

2. Loosen the top holder, arrow 2. To do so,
press in the middle latch and then press
out both outside latches.
Remove the lamp holder, arrow 3.

Lights in the tailgate
General information
Follow general instructions, refer to page 209.
Reversing lights: 16-watt bulb, PW16W.

3. Unscrew the defective bulb of the revers‐
ing or brake lamp from its socket counter‐
clockwise.
4. Insert the new bulb.

Inner brake lights: 21-watt bulb, H21W

Installing the bulb holder

Accessing the lights

1. Insert the two contacts, arrow 1, into the
connections, arrow 2.

Slide the cover outwards, arrow, and remove.

2. Press on the bulb holder, arrow 3. Make
sure that the two exterior holders latch into
place.
3. Place the cover back in position and slide it
inwards.

Rear lamp, license plate lamp and
central brake lamp
Follow general instructions, refer to page 209.

214

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Replacing components

These lights are made using LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.

Changing wheels
Hints
When using run-flat tires or sealants, a tire
does not need to be changed immediately in
the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.
Which is why no spare tire is available.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
accessories from your service center.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

Mobility

Battery replacement
Use approved vehicle batteries only
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
ble.◀
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by the service center
to ensure that all comfort features are fully
available and that any Check Control mes‐
sages of these comfort features are no longer
displayed.

Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the positions shown.

▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐
riods, longer than a month.

Hints

Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free.
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
Further information about the battery can be
obtained from your service center.

Do not connect charging devices to the
12 volt socket in the vehicle
Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐
tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as
this may damage the vehicle battery due to an
increased power consumption.◀

Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 220, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

215

Mobility

Replacing components

Power failure

In the engine compartment

After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be newly initialized or individual set‐
tings updated, e. g.:

1. Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen
the three cover screws, arrow 1.

▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
tions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof and sliding visor: initialize
the system, refer to page 50.

Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by your
service center or bring them to a recy‐
cling center.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.

2. Pull up the holder, arrow 2.
3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3.
4. Press the four fasteners and remove the
cover.

Fuses
Hints
Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐
tute of another color or amperage rating; this
could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐
sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box
in the trunk.

Attaching the covers
1. When attaching the cover, make sure that
all four fasteners are engaged.
2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and
then thread it between the bars.

3. Press down on the holder and tighten the
three screws.

216

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Replacing components

In the trunk
1. Fold the cargo floor panel up, arrow.

Mobility

2. Pull the cargo floor panel to the loading lip,
arrow 1, and press downward, arrow 2.

2. Reach under the cargo floor panel and fold
the cargo floor panel up, arrow.

Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.

Attaching the cargo floor panel
1. Proceed in the reverse order to attach the
cargo floor panel.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

217

Mobility

Breakdown assistance

Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

Hints
Emergency Request not guaranteed
For technical reasons, the Emergency
Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐
able conditions.◀

Overview

Hazard warning flashers

SOS button in the roofliner

Requirements
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
The button is located in the center console.

▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.

Intelligent Emergency
Request

1. Press the cover briefly to open it.

The concept

2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the
button lights up green.

In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
quest can be made through this system.

▷ The LED lights up green: an Emergency
Request was initiated.

General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.

Initiating an Emergency Request

If a cancel prompt appears on the display,
the Emergency Request can be aborted.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
to the BMW Response Center has been
established.

218

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Breakdown assistance

When the emergency request is received
at the BMW Response Center, the BMW
Response Center contacts you and takes
further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this, data are transmitted to the BMW
Response Center which serve to deter‐
mine the necessary rescue measures. E. g.
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
be established.

Mobility

First aid kit
Note
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.

Storage

▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW
Response Center can no longer be heard
via the speaker, you can nevertheless still
be heard at the BMW Response Center.

Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.

The first aid kit is located behind the left-hand
cover in the trunk.

Jump-starting
General information

Warning triangle

If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.

Hints
Do not touch live parts
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐
jury, always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running.◀
The warning triangle is located in the tailgate.
To open the catches, arrows, turn through 90°.
Fold back the trim.

To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

219

Mobility

Breakdown assistance

Connecting the cables

Preparation
Bodywork contact between vehicles
Make sure that there is no contact be‐
tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐
wise, there is a danger of short circuits.◀
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐
mation can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.

Starting aid terminals
Connecting order
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order to prevent risk of injury from arcing.◀

1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aid
terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐
gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐
tive terminal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge if needed.

The body ground or a special nut acts as the
battery negative terminal.

220

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Breakdown assistance

Tow-starting and towing

Tow truck

Note

With rear-wheel drive

Mobility

Tow-starting and towing
For tow-starting or towing, switch off the
Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐
tions of the individual braking systems might
lead to accidents.◀

Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Your vehicle should be transported with a tow
truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

Towing
Follow the towing instructions
Follow all towing instructions; otherwise,
vehicle damage or accidents may occur.◀
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn
signals, and wipers may be unavailable.
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.

Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.◀
With xDrive

▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and
steering.
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise,
it will not be possible to control the vehi‐
cle's response.

The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
Do not tow with only the front or rear axle
raised
Do not tow the BMW with just the front or rear
axle raised; otherwise, the wheels could lock
up and the transfer case could be damaged.◀
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.◀

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

221

Mobility

Breakdown assistance

Steptronic transmission: transporting
your vehicle
Note
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Therefore, contact a service center in the
event of a breakdown.
Do not have the vehicle towed
Have your vehicle transported on a load‐
ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐
cur.◀

Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.◀
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.

Tow bar
Tow truck

The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.

The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.◀
Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐
sitioning the vehicle.

Towing other vehicles
Hints

Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the BMW.

Light towing vehicle
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse.◀

222

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Breakdown assistance

Mobility

Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.

Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 219. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐
alytic converter, only tow-start while the en‐
gine is cold.
The tow fitting is located in the onboard vehi‐
cle tool kit which is stored in a storage com‐
partment on the left side in the trunk. Open the
cover.
Tow fitting, information on use
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.

1. Switch on the hazard warning system and
comply with local regulations.
2. Ignition, refer to page 65, on.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release
the pedal. After the engine starts, immedi‐
ately press on the clutch pedal again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope, and switch off the hazard
warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked.

Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the
vehicle can occur.◀

Screw thread for tow fitting

Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
push it out.

Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the Steptronic transmission.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

223

Mobility

Care

Care
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

Cleaning sensors/camera lenses with
high-pressure washers
When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors and camera lenses on the
outside of the vehicle for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀

Automatic car washes
Hints
Do not use high pressure washing sys‐
tems

Car washes
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as
leaves in the area below the windshield when
the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
age the vehicle.

Hints
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away
and use a maximum temperature of
140 ℉/60 ℃.
If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a
distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main‐
tained. Holding them too close or using exces‐
sively high pressures or temperatures can
cause damage or preliminary damage that may
then lead to long-term damage.
Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure
washer.◀

With washing systems operating at high pres‐
sures and nozzle positions close to the win‐
dows, drops of water can penetrate.◀
▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width
of the vehicle.
▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
page 71, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
vation.
▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can
be triggered by the interior motion sensor
of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐
tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm,
refer to page 47.
Guide rails in car washes
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
could be damaged.◀

Before driving into a car wash
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
car wash, take the following steps:
224

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Care

Mobility

Manual transmission:

Headlights

1. Drive into the car wash.

▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
acidic cleansers.

2. Shift to neutral.
3. Switch the engine off.
4. Switch on the ignition.
Steptronic transmission:
1. Drive into the car wash.
2. Engage selector lever position N.
3. Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains switched
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐
played.
Do not turn off the ignition in the car
wash
Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash;
otherwise, selector lever position P is en‐
gaged and damages can result.◀
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside
when in selector lever position N. A signal
sounds when an attempt is made to lock the
vehicle.
To start the engine with manual transmission:
1. Press on the clutch pedal.

▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g.,
from insects, with shampoo and wash off
with water.
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced and corrosion of the brake
discs can occur.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.

Vehicle care
Car care products
BMW recommends using care and cleaning
products from BMW, since these have been
tested and approved.

2. Press the Start/Stop button.

Car care and cleaning products

To start the engine with Steptronic transmis‐
sion:

Follow the instructions on the container.

1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐
ping on the brake turns the ignition off.

Selector lever position
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
▷ After approx. 15 minutes.

When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
cles.
Cleansers can contain substances that are
dangerous and harmful to your health.◀

Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your car care to these
influences.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

225

Mobility

Care

Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
Only use respectively approved cleaning and
care products for vehicles with matte finish.
Suitable care products for matte finishes are
available from the service center.

Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, provide leather care roughly every
two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.

Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disk.

Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.

Rubber components
Aside from water, treat only with rubber
cleansers.

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.

When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any
silicon-containing car care products in order to
avoid damage or noises.

Suitable care products are available from the
service center.

Fine wood parts

Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage
stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth
with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously.
Damage from Velcro® fasteners
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or
other articles of clothing can damage the seat
covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are
closed.◀

Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.

Plastic components
These include:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.

226

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Care

No cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or
solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead
to surface damage.◀

Mobility

Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.

Displays/monitors
Cleaning displays and screens

Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Chemical cleaning
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
the webbing.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety
belts until they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the
function of the pedals could be impeded while
driving and create the risk of an accident.
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.

Do not use any chemical or household
cleaning agents; otherwise, surfaces can be af‐
fected.◀
Keeping out moisture
Keep all fluids and moisture away from
the unit; otherwise, electrical components can
be damaged.◀
Avoid pressure
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning
and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise,
damage can result.◀
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

Long-term
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be
taken. Additional information is available from
the service center.

Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly attached to
floor.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐
tened again after they were removed for clean‐
ing, e.g.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐
rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

227

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Reference

Technical data

Technical data
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

Note
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
for example, due to the selected special equip‐
ment, country version or country-specific
measurement method. Detailed values can be

found in the approval documents, on informa‐
tion signs on the vehicle or can be obtained
from the service center.
The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ways has priority.

Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.

roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,
for example, due to the selected special equip‐
ment, tires, load and chassis version.

The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,
BMW 4 Series Gran Coupe
Width with mirrors

inches/mm

79.4/2,017

Width without mirrors

inches/mm

71.9/1,825

Height

inches/mm

54.7–55.3/1,389–
1,404

Length

inches/mm

182.6/4,639

Wheelbase

inches/mm

110.6/2,810

Smallest turning radius diam.

ft/m

37.1–38.7/11.3–11.8

Weights
The values preceding the slash apply to vehi‐
cles with manual transmission; the values fol‐

230

lowing the slash apply to vehicles with Step‐
tronic transmission.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Technical data

Reference

428i
Approved gross vehicle weight

Load

Approved front axle load

Approved rear axle load

Approved roof load capacity

Cargo area capacity

lbs

4,560/4,605

2,068/2,089

lbs

910

413

lbs

2,050

930

lbs

2,665

1,209

lbs

165

cu ft

17.0-45.9

Liters

480–1,300

lbs

4,730

2,145

lbs

910

413

lbs

2,170

984

lbs

2,690

1,220

lbs

165

cu ft

17.0-45.9

Liters

480–1,300

435i
Approved gross vehicle weight

Load

Approved front axle load

Approved rear axle load

Approved roof load capacity

Cargo area capacity

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

231

Reference

Technical data

428i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight

Load

Approved front axle load

Approved rear axle load

Approved roof load capacity

Cargo area capacity

lbs

4,750

2,155

lbs

910

413

lbs

2,180

989

lbs

2,690

1,220

lbs

165

cu ft

17.0-45.9

Liters

480–1,300

lbs

4,870

2,209

lbs

910

413

lbs

2,290

1,039

lbs

2,690

1,220

lbs

165

cu ft

17.0-45.9

Liters

480–1,300

435i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight

Load

Approved front axle load

Approved rear axle load

Approved roof load capacity

Cargo area capacity

232

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Technical data

Reference

Capacities

Fuel tank, approx.

US gal/liters

Notes

Gasoline: 15.8/60

Fuel quality, refer to
page 186

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

233

Reference

Everything from A to Z

Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 120
ACC, Active Cruise Control
with Stop & Go 125
Acceleration Assistant, refer
to Launch Control 76
Accessories and parts 7
Activated-charcoal filter 151
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 117
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go, ACC 125
Adaptive brake lights, refer to
Brake force display 119
Adaptive Light Control 94
Additives, oil 204
Adjustments, seats/head re‐
straints 51
After washing vehicle 225
Airbags 98
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 99
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
culated-air mode 147, 150
Air, dehumidifying, refer to
Cooling function 147, 150
Air distribution,
manual 147, 150
Air flow, air conditioner 147
Air flow, automatic climate
control 150
Air pressure, tires 188
Air vents, refer to Ventila‐
tion 151
Alarm system 46
Alarm, unintentional 47
All around the center con‐
sole 16
All around the roofliner 17
234

All around the steering
wheel 14
All-season tires, refer to Win‐
ter tires 195
All-wheel-drive 121
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 154
Alternative oil types 205
Ambient light 97
Antifreeze, washer fluid 72
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 120
Anti-slip control, refer to
DSC 120
Approved axle load 230
Approved engine oils, see
Suitable engine oil
types 205
Arrival time 89
Ash tray 157
Assistance when driving
off 124
Assist system information, on
Control Display 91
Attentiveness assistant 119
AUTO intensity 149
Automatic car wash 224
Automatic climate con‐
trol 146
Automatic climate control
with enhanced features 148
Automatic Cruise Control
with Stop & Go 125
Automatic Curb Monitor 59
Automatic deactivation, frontseat passenger airbags 100
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 94
Automatic locking 45
Automatic recirculated-air
control 150

Automatic tailgate 40
Automatic transmission, see
Steptronic transmission 73
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 149
AUTO program, climate con‐
trol 147
AUTO program, intensity 149
Auto Start/Stop function 67
Average fuel consumption 88
Average speed 88
Axle loads, weights 230

B
Backrest curvature, refer to
Lumbar support 53
Backrest, width 53
Band-aids, refer to First aid
kit 219
Bar for tow-starting/
towing 222
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 215
Battery replacement, vehicle
remote control 35
Battery, vehicle 215
Belts, safety belts 54
Beverage holder, cu‐
pholder 163
BMW Assist, see user's
manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
BMW Driver’s Guide App 6
BMW Homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 207
Bonus range, ECO PRO 176

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Everything from A to Z

Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐
pholders 163
Brake assistant 120
Brake discs, break-in 168
Brake force display 119
Brake lights, adaptive 119
Brake lights, brake force dis‐
play 119
Brake pads, break-in 168
Braking, hints 169
Breakdown assistance 218
Break-in 168
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 91
Bulb replacement 209
Bulb replacement, front 210
Bulb replacement, LED head‐
lights 211
Bulb replacement, rear 212
Bulb replacement, xenon
headlights 210
Bulbs and lights 209
Button, RES 128
Button, Start/Stop 65
Bypassing, refer to Jumpstarting 219

C
California Proposition 65
Warning 7
Camera lenses, care 227
Camera, rearview cam‐
era 136
Camera, Side View 139
Camera, Top View 140
Can holder, refer to Cuphold‐
ers 163
Car battery 215
Car care products 225
Care, displays 227
Care, vehicle 225
Cargo 171
Cargo area 159
Cargo area, enlarging 159

Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 163
Cargo cover 159
Cargo, securing 172
Cargo straps, securing
cargo 172
Car key, refer to Remote con‐
trol 34
Carpet, care 227
Car wash 224
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 169
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 207
CD/Multimedia, see user's
manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
Center armrest 162
Center console 16
Central locking system 40
Central screen, refer to Con‐
trol Display 18
Changes, technical, refer to
Safety 7
Changing parts 209
Changing wheels 215
Changing wheels/tires 194
Chassis number, see vehicle
identification number 9
Check Control 79
Checking the engine oil level
electronically 203
Checking the oil level elec‐
tronically 203
Children, seating position 61
Children, transporting
safely 61
Child restraint fixing sys‐
tem 61
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 63
Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 61
Child safety locks 64
Child seat, mounting 61

Reference

Child seats 61
Chrome parts, care 226
Cigarette lighter 157
Cleaning displays 227
Climate control 146, 148
Clock 83
Closing/opening via door
lock 39
Closing/opening with remote
control 37
Closing the tailgate with notouch activation 44
Clothes hooks 163
Coasting 178
Coasting with engine decou‐
pled, coasting 178
Coasting with idling en‐
gine 178
Cockpit 14
Combination reel, refer to
Turn signals 69
Combination switch, refer to
Wiper system 70
Comfort Access 42
COMFORT program, Dy‐
namic Driving Control 123
Compartments in the
doors 162
Compass 155
Compressor 196
Computer, refer to On-board
computer 87
Condensation on win‐
dows 151
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 170
Condition Based Service
CBS 207
Configuring driving pro‐
gram 124
Confirmation signal 45
ConnectedDrive, see user's
manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
ConnectedDrive Services

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

235

Reference

Everything from A to Z

Connecting electrical devi‐
ces 157
Continued driving with a flat
tire 103, 106
Control Display 18
Control Display, settings 90
Controller 18, 19
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 120
Convenient opening with the
remote control 37
Coolant 206
Coolant level 206
Coolant temperature 83
Cooling function 147, 150
Cooling, maximum 149
Cooling system 206
Cornering light 94
Corrosion on brake discs 170
Cosmetic mirror 157
Courtesy lamps during un‐
locking 37
Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐
cle locked 38
Cruise control 131
Cruise control, active with
Stop & Go 125
Cruising range 83
Cupholders 163
Current fuel consumption 84

D
Damage, tires 194
Damping control, dy‐
namic 122
Data, technical 230
Date 83
Daytime running lights 94
Defrosting, refer to defrosting
the windows 147
Defrosting, refer to Windows,
defrosting 151
Defrosting the windows 147
Dehumidifying, air 147, 150
Deleting personal data 25

236

Deletion of personal data 25
Destination distance 88
Digital clock 83
Digital compass 155
Dimensions 230
Dimmable exterior mirrors 59
Dimmable interior rearview
mirror 59
Direction indicator, refer to
Turn signals 69
Display, electronic, instru‐
ment cluster 78
Display in windshield 91
Display lighting, refer to In‐
strument lighting 96
Displays, cleaning 227
Disposal, coolant 206
Disposal, vehicle battery 216
Distance control, refer to
PDC 133
Distance to destination 88
Divided screen view, split
screen 23
Door lock 39
Door lock, refer to Remote
control 34
Drive-off assistant 124
Drive-off assistant, refer to
DSC 120
Driver assistance, refer to In‐
telligent Safety 107
Driving Assistant, refer to In‐
telligent Safety 107
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 122
Driving instructions, breakin 168
Driving mode 122
Driving notes, general 168
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 120
Driving style analysis 179
Driving tips 168
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 120

DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 121
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 122
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 120
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 121

E
ECO PRO 175
ECO PRO, bonus range 176
ECO PRO display 175
ECO PRO driving mode 175
ECO PRO driving style analy‐
sis 179
ECO PRO mode 175
ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐
struction 177
EfficientDynamics 178
Electronic displays, instru‐
ment cluster 78
Electronic oil measure‐
ment 203
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to DSC 120
Emergency detection, remote
control 35
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 184
Emergency Request 218
Emergency start function, en‐
gine start 35
Emergency unlocking, tail‐
gate 42
Emergency unlocking, trans‐
mission lock 76
Energy Control 84
Energy recovery 84
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 67
Engine, automatic switchoff 67
Engine compartment 201

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Everything from A to Z

Engine compartment, work‐
ing in 202
Engine coolant 206
Engine idling when driving,
coasting 178
Engine oil 203
Engine oil, adding 204
Engine oil additives 204
Engine oil change 205
Engine oil filler neck 204
Engine oil temperature 82
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 205
Engine oil types, ap‐
proved 205
Engine start during malfunc‐
tion 35
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 219
Engine start, refer to Starting
the engine 66
Engine stop 66
Engine temperature 82
Entering a car wash 224
Equipment, interior 153
Error displays, see Check
Control 79
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, refer to DSC 120
Exchanging wheels/tires 194
Exhaust system 169
Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 59
Exterior mirrors 58
External start 219
External temperature dis‐
play 83
External temperature warn‐
ing 83
Eyes for securing cargo 172

F
Failure message, see Check
Control 79

False alarm, refer to Uninten‐
tional alarm 47
Fan, refer to Air
flow 147, 150
Filler neck for engine oil 204
Fine wood, care 226
First aid kit 219
Fitting for towing, see Tow fit‐
ting 222
Flat tire, changing
wheels 215
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 105
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 101
Flat tire, warning
lamp 102, 105
Flooding 169
Floor carpet, care 227
Floor mats, care 227
Fogged up windows 147
Folding back rear seat back‐
rests 159
Fold-out position, wiper 72
Foot brake 169
Front airbags 98
Front-end collision warning
with braking function 110
Front-end collision warning
with City Braking func‐
tion 108
Front fog lights 96
Front fog lights, front, bulb re‐
placement 212
Front lights 210
front-seat passenger airbags,
automatic deactivation 100
Front-seat passenger airbags,
indicator lamp 100
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 105
Fuel 186
Fuel consumption, current 84
Fuel consumption, refer to
Average fuel consump‐
tion 88
Fuel filler flap 184
Fuel gauge 82

Reference

Fuel lid 184
Fuel quality 186
Fuel recommendation 186
Fuel, tank capacity 233
Fuse 216

G
Garage door opener, refer to
Universal Integrated Remote
Control 153
Gasoline 186
Gear change, Steptronic
transmission 74
Gear shift indicator 85
General driving notes 168
Glare shield 157
Glass sunroof, powered 49
Glove compartment 161
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 230

H
Handbrake, refer to parking
brake 69
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 154
Hazard warning flashers 218
Head airbags 98
Headlight control, auto‐
matic 94
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture 94
Headlight flasher 70
Headlight glass 210
Headlights 210
Headlights, care 225
Headlight washer system 70
Head restraints 51
Head restraints, front 55
Head restraints, rear 56
Head-up Display 91
Head-up Display, care 227
Heavy cargo, stowing 172
Height, vehicle 230

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

237

Reference

Everything from A to Z

High-beam Assistant 95
High beams 70
High beams/low beams, refer
to High-beam Assistant 95
Hills 170
Hill start assistant, refer to
Drive-off assistant 124
Hints 6
Holder for beverages 163
Homepage 6
Hood 202
Horn 14
Hotel function, tailgate 42
Hot exhaust system 169
HUD Head-up Display 91
Hydroplaning 169

I
Ice warning, see External
temperature warning 83
Icy roads, see External tem‐
perature warning 83
Identification marks, tires 192
Identification number, see ve‐
hicle identification num‐
ber 9
iDrive 18
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control 34
Ignition off 65
Ignition on 65
Indication of a flat
tire 102, 105
Indicator and alarm lamps,
see Check Control 79
Indicator lamp, see Check
Control 79
Individual air distribu‐
tion 147, 150
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 35
Inflation pressure, tires 188
Inflation pressure warning
FTM, tires 105

238

Info display, refer to OnBoard computer 87
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 102
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 105
Instrument cluster 78
Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 78
Instrument lighting 96
Integrated key 34
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle 30
Intelligent Emergency Re‐
quest 218
Intelligent Safety 107
Intensity, AUTO pro‐
gram 149
Interior equipment 153
Interior lights 96
Interior lights during unlock‐
ing 37
Interior lights with the vehicle
locked 38
Interior motion sensor 47
Interior rearview mirror, auto‐
matic dimming feature 59
Interior rearview mirror, com‐
pass 155
Interior rearview mirror, man‐
ually dimmable 59
Internet page 6
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 84
Interval mode 71

J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 215
Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐
sion 74
Jump-starting 219

K
Key/remote control 34
Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
Access 42
Key Memory, refer to Per‐
sonal Profile 35
Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐
mission 73
Knee airbag 99

L
Lamp replacement 209
Lamp replacement, front 210
Lamp replacement, rear 212
Lane departure warning 115
Lane margin, warning 115
Language on Control Dis‐
play 91
Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 172
LATCH child restraint sys‐
tem 63
Launch Control 76
Leather, care 226
LED light, bulb replace‐
ment 211
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 210
Length, vehicle 230
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 25
Light alloy wheels, care 226
Light control 94
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 210
Lighter 157
Lighting 93
Lights 93
Lights and bulbs 209
Light switch 93
Load 172
Loading 171
Lock, door 39

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Everything from A to Z

Locking/unlocking via door
lock 39
Locking/unlocking with re‐
mote control 37
Locking, automatic 45
Locking, settings 45
Lock, power window 48
Locks, doors, and win‐
dows 64
Low beams 93
Low beams, automatic, refer
to High-beam Assistant 95
Lower back support 53
Luggage rack, see Roofmounted luggage rack 173
Lumbar support 53

M
Maintenance 207
Maintenance require‐
ments 207
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 84
Maintenance system,
BMW 207
Make-up mirror 157
Malfunction displays, see
Check Control 79
Manual air distribu‐
tion 147, 150
Manual air flow 147, 150
Manual mode, Steptronic
transmission 74
Manual operation, door
lock 39
Manual operation, exterior
mirrors 58
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 184
Manual operation, Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 134
Manual operation, rearview
camera 137
Manual operation, Side
View 139

Manual operation, Top
View 140
Manual transmission 73
Marking on approved
tires 195
Marking, run-flat tires 196
Master key, refer to Remote
control 34
Maximum cooling 149
Maximum speed, display 86
Maximum speed, winter
tires 195
Measure, units of 91
Medical kit 219
Memory, seat, mirror 57
Menu, EfficientDynamics 178
Menu in instrument clus‐
ter 87
Menus, operating, iDrive 18
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐
ing concept 20
Messages, see Check Con‐
trol 79
Microfilter 148, 151
Minimum tread, tires 194
Mirror 58
Mirror memory 57
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 169
Mobility System 196
Modifications, technical, refer
to Safety 7
Moisture in headlight 210
Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐
play 18
Mounting of child restraint
systems 61
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 14

N
Navigation, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication

Reference

Neck restraints, front, refer to
Head restraints 55
Neck restraints, rear, refer to
Head restraints 56
Neutral cleaner, see wheel
cleaner 226
New wheels and tires 194
Nylon rope for tow-starting/
towing 222

O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 208
OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐
agnosis 208
Obstacle marking, rearview
camera 137
Octane rating, refer to Rec‐
ommended fuel grade 186
Odometer 83
Office, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Oil 203
Oil, adding 204
Oil additives 204
Oil change 205
Oil change interval, service
requirements 84
Oil filler neck 204
Oil types, alternative 205
Oil types, approved 205
Old batteries, disposal 216
On-board computer 87
Onboard monitor, refer to
Control Display 18
Onboard vehicle tool kit 209
Opening/closing via door
lock 39
Opening and closing 34
Opening and closing, without
remote control 39
Opening and closing, with re‐
mote control 37
Opening the tailgate with notouch activation 44

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

239

Reference

Everything from A to Z

Operating concept, iDrive 18
Optional equipment, standard
equipment 6
Outside air, refer to Auto‐
matic recirculated-air con‐
trol 150
Overheating of engine, refer
to Coolant temperature 83

P
Paint, vehicle 225
Parallel parking assistant 141
Park Distance Control
PDC 133
Parked-car ventilation 152
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 170
Parking aid, refer to PDC 133
Parking assistant 141
Parking brake 69
Parking lights 93
Parts and accessories 7
Passenger side mirror, tilting
downward 59
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
era 137
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 133
Pedestrian warning with city
braking function 113
Personal Profile 35
Personal Profile, exporting
profiles 36
Personal Profile, importing
profiles 37
Pinch protection system,
glass sunroof 49
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 48
Plastic, care 226
Power failure 216
Power sunroof, glass 49
Power windows 47
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 188

240

Pressure warning FTM,
tires 105
Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐
file 35
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 24
Protective function, glass
sunroof 49
Protective function, win‐
dows 48
Push-and-turn switch, refer to
Controller 18, 19

R
Radiator fluid 206
Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control 34
Radio ready state 65
Radio, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Rain sensor 71
Rear lights 214
Rear socket 158
Rear turn signal, bulb replace‐
ment 212
Rearview camera 136
Rearview mirror 58
Rear window de‐
froster 147, 150
Recirculated-air filter 151
Recirculated-air
mode 147, 150
Recommended fuel
grade 186
Recommended tire
brands 195
Refueling 184
Remaining range 83
Remote control/key 34
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 38
Remote control, univer‐
sal 153
Replacement fuse 216

Replacing parts 209
Replacing wheels/tires 194
Reporting safety defects 9
RES button 128
RES button, see Active
Cruise Control, ACC 125
RES button, see Cruise con‐
trol 131
Reserve warning, refer to
Range 83
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 102
Retaining straps, securing
cargo 172
Retreaded tires 195
Roadside parking lights 94
RON recommended fuel
grade 186
Roofliner 17
Roof load lidacity 230
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 173
Rope for tow-starting/
towing 222
RSC Run Flat System Com‐
ponent, refer to Run-flat
tires 196
Rubber components,
care 226
Run-flat tires 196

S
Safe braking 169
Safety 7
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passen‐
ger seat 55
Safety belts 54
Safety belts, care 227
Safety switch, windows 48
Safety systems, airbags 98
Saving fuel 174
Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
play 18

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Everything from A to Z

Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit 209
Screw thread, see screw
thread for tow fitting, screw
thread for tow fitting 223
Sealant 196
Seat and mirror memory 57
Seat belts, refer to Safety
belts 54
Seat heating, front 54
Seat heating, rear 54
Seating position for chil‐
dren 61
Seats 51
Selection list in instrument
cluster 87
Selector lever, Steptronic
transmission 74
Sensors, care 227
Service and warranty 8
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service
CBS 207
Service requirements, dis‐
play 84
Services, ConnectedDrive
Servotronic 124
SET button, see Active
Cruise Control, ACC 125
SET button, see Cruise con‐
trol 131
Settings, locking/unlock‐
ing 45
Settings on Control Dis‐
play 90
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
ror 57
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 75
Side airbags 98
Side View 138
Signaling, horn 14
Signals when unlocking 45
Sitting safely 51
Size 230
Slide/tilt glass roof 49

Smallest turning radius 230
Snow chains 199
Socket 157
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 208
SOS button 218
Spare fuse 216
Specified engine oil
types 205
Speed, average 88
Speed limit detection, onboard computer 89
Speed limiter, display 86
Speed Limit Information 86
Speed warning 89
Split screen 23
SPORT+ - program, Dynamic
Driving Control 123
Sport displays, torque dis‐
play, performance dis‐
play 89
SPORT program, Dynamic
Driving Control 123
Sport program, transmis‐
sion 74
Sport steering, variable 122
Stability control systems 120
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 67
Start/Stop button 65
Start function during malfunc‐
tion 35
Starting the engine 66
Status control display,
tires 102
Status information, iDrive 23
Status of Owner's Manual 7
Steering assistance 124
Steering wheel, adjusting 60
Steering wheel heating 60
Steptronic Sport transmis‐
sion, refer to Steptronic
transmission 73
Steptronic transmission 73
Stopping the engine 66

Reference

Storage compartment in the
rear 163
Storage compartments 161
Storage compartments, loca‐
tions 161
Storage, tires 196
Storing the vehicle 227
Suitable engine oils 205
Summer tires, tread 193
Sun visor 157
Supplementary text mes‐
sage 82
Surround View 136
Switch for Dynamic Driv‐
ing 122
Switch-on times, parked-car
ventilation 152
Switch, refer to Cockpit 14
Symbols 6
Symbols in the status field 23

T
Tachometer 82
Tailgate, automatic 40
Tailgate, closing with notouch activation 44
Tailgate, emergency unlock‐
ing 42
Tailgate, hotel function 42
Tailgate, opening with notouch activation 44
Tailgate via remote con‐
trol 38
Tail lights 212
Technical changes, refer to
Safety 7
Technical data 230
Telephone, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 147, 149
Temperature display for ex‐
ternal temperature 83
Temperature, engine oil 82

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

241

Reference

Everything from A to Z

Tempomat, refer to Active
Cruise Control 125
Terminal, starting aid 220
Text message, supplemen‐
tary 82
Theft alarm system, refer to
Alarm system 46
Thigh support 53
Tilt alarm sensor 47
Time of arrival 89
Tire damage 194
Tire identification marks 192
Tire inflation pressure 188
Tire inflation pressure moni‐
tor, refer to FTM 105
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 101
Tires, changing 194
Tire sealant 196
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 188
Tires, run-flat tires 196
Tire tread 193
Tone, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Tool 209
Top View 139
Total vehicle weight 230
Touchpad 21
Tow fitting 222
Towing 221
Tow lug, see Tow fitting 222
Tow-starting 221
Tow truck 221
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 101
Traction control 121
TRACTION, driving dynam‐
ics 121
Transmission lock, electronic
unlocking 76
Transmission, manual trans‐
mission 73
Transmission, Steptronic
transmission 73

242

Transporting children
safely 61
Tread, tires 193
Trip computer 89
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 70
Trip odometer 83
Truck for tow-starting/
towing 221
Turning circle 230
Turning circle lines, rearview
camera 137
Turn signals, operation 69

U
Unintentional alarm 47
Units of measure 91
Universal remote control 153
Unlock button, Steptronic
transmission 74
Unlocking/locking via door
lock 39
Unlocking/locking with re‐
mote control 37
Unlocking, settings 45
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 7
Upholstery care 226
USB interface 158

V
Vanity mirror 157
Variable sport steering 122
Vehicle battery 215
Vehicle battery, replac‐
ing 215
Vehicle, break-in 168
Vehicle care 225
Vehicle features and op‐
tions 6
Vehicle identification num‐
ber 9
Vehicle jack 215
Vehicle paint 225

Vehicle storage 227
Vehicle wash 224
Ventilation 151
Ventilation, refer to Parkedcar ventilation 152
VIN, see vehicle identification
number 9
Voice activation system 27

W
Warning and indicator lamps,
see Check Control 79
Warning displays, see Check
Control 79
Warning messages, see
Check Control 79
Warning triangle 219
Warranty 7
Washer fluid 72
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 72
Washer system 70
Washing, vehicle 224
Water on roads 169
Weights 230
Welcome lamps during un‐
locking 37
Welcome lights 93
Wheel base, vehicle 230
Wheel cleaner 226
Wheels, changing 194
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 188
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 105
Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 101
Width, vehicle 230
Window defroster,
rear 147, 150
Windows, powered 47
Windshield washer fluid 72
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 72

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Everything from A to Z

Reference

Windshield washer sys‐
tem 70
Windshield wiper 70
Winter storage, care 227
Winter tires, suitable
tires 195
Winter tires, tread 193
Wiper 70
Wiper blades, replacing 209
Wiper fluid 72
Wiper, fold-out position 72
Wiper system 70
Wood, care 226
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 25
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
tool kit 209

X
xDrive 121
Xenon headlights, bulb re‐
placement 210

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

243

More about BMW

The Ultimate
Driving Machine®

01 40 2 960 707 ue

bmwusa.com

*BL296070700L*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 707 - II/15

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Create Date                     : 2014:10:22 17:29:55+01:00
Creator Tool                    : AH XSL Formatter V6.0 MR3a for Windows : 6.0.4.6312 (2012/07/18 11:00JST)
Modify Date                     : 2015:01:14 15:47:38+01:00
Metadata Date                   : 2015:01:14 15:47:38+01:00
Producer                        : Antenna House PDF Output Library 2.6.0 (Windows)
Trapped                         : False
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:e293fbe9-515f-4a8f-bc23-fa35d58921c5
Instance ID                     : uuid:d432bb17-a59b-4e2b-9490-a0aca268f0b9
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 249
Creator                         : AH XSL Formatter V6.0 MR3a for Windows : 6.0.4.6312 (2012/07/18 11:00JST)

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Bmw 2015 428I Gran Coupe Owners Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation